Está en la página 1de 322

T3408-380-01

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Milling using Creo Parametric

Authored and published using

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

Fo

rP
TC

In

Copyright 2011 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.


Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its
subsidiary companies (collectively PTC), and their respective licensors. This software
is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and
proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and
other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to
third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN
CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright
laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement
that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to
the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation
if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance
with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy
made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided
by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of
PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to
any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any
means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make
copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to
change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by
PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may
appear in this document.
For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see
backside of this guide.

About PTC University


Welcome to PTC University!
With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge,
PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only
PTC University offers:

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

An innovative learning methodology - PTCs Precision Learning


Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and
deliver learning solutions.
Flexible Delivery Options PTC University ensures you receive the same
quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive
experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules
facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.
Premier Content and Expertise A thorough instructor certification process
and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting
organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified
instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices
derived from thousands of deployments.
Global Focus PTC University delivers training where and when you
need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries
offering content in nine languages.
Delivering Value A role-based learning design ensures the right people
have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the
organizations overall performance goals.

rP
TC

The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning
offerings that PTC University has available. These include:

Fo

Instructor-led Training (ILT) - The ideal blend of classroom lectures,


personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and
post-classroom tools.
Pro/FICIENCY - This Web-based, skills assessment and
development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity.
eLearning Libraries - 24/7 access to Web-based training that will
compliment your instructor-led course.
Precision LMS - A powerful learning management system that will manage
your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.

PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are


corporate learning programs designed to your organizations specific goals,
current skills, desired competencies and training preferences.
Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most
out of your PTC products.

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers


North America

nl

Education Services Registration


Tel: (888) 782-3773
Fax: (781) 370-5307
Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
Tel: (800) 477-6435
Fax: (781) 707-0328
License Management and Contracts
Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)
Fax: (781) 707-0331

se

Europe

Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting


Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)

al

Asia

rn

Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact


information.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web
site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions
to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical
support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base
searches, reference libraries and documentation. You can also find general
information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer
Support, and PTC Partners.

Precision Learning
Precision Learning In The Classroom
PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop
effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity
of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven
instructional design principal of Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do:

nl

Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key


concepts.
These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the
software application.
You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.

se

After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided in order for you to


assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also
identify the class topics that require further review.

al

At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via
your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training
on how to do this after the class.

rn

Precision Learning After the Class

In

te

Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning
account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already
have one.
As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:

Fo

rP
TC

A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a


Recommended Learning Report based on your results.
A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same
instructional approach of lecture, demonstration and exercise. The
Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training
that you may want to review.
Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.
The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the
live class.

Precision Learning Recommendations

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated
training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are
available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of
our Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.

Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and
that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.
Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map
corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor
recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that
corresponds to your role and job functions.

Training Agenda
Introduction to Manufacturing
Creating Manufacturing Models
Configuring Operations
Using Reference Models
Using Workpiece Models
Creating and Using NC Model Assemblies
Creating and Configuring Workcells

nl

Module 01
Module 02
Module 03
Module 04
Module 05
Module 06
Module 07

Day 2

se

Creating and Configuring Tools


Using Template Manufacturing Models
Using Manufacturing Parameters
Creating Face Milling Sequences

Module 08
Module 09
Module 10
Module 11

In

te

rn

Creating Volume Milling Sequences


Creating Profile Milling Sequences
Creating Straight Cut Surface Milling Sequences
Creating From Surface Isolines Surface Milling Sequences

rP
TC

Day 4

al

Day 3
Module 12
Module 13
Module 14
Module 15

Day 1

Fo

Module 16
Module 17
Module 18
Module 19

Creating Cut Line Surface Milling Sequences


Advanced Surface Milling Options
Creating Roughing and Re-roughing Sequences
Creating Finishing Sequences

Day 5

Module 20
Module 21
Module 22
Module 23

Creating Trajectory Milling Sequences


Creating Holemaking Sequences
Using the Process Manager
Creating and Post-Processing CL Data Files

rP
TC

Fo

al

rn

te

In
se

nl

Table of Contents
Milling using Creo Parametric
Introduction to Manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Manufacturing Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Creating Manufacturing Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Creating Manufacturing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Configuring Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1


Configuring Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

nl

Using Reference Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


Using Reference Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

se

Using Workpiece Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


Using Workpiece Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Creating and Using NC Model Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


Creating and Using NC Model Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

al

Creating and Configuring Workcells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


Creating and Configuring Workcells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Creating and Configuring Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


Understanding Milling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Creating Standard Milling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Creating Solid Model Milling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Creating and Using Tool Cutting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Retrieving Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Using Template Manufacturing Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Using Template Manufacturing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Fo

Using Manufacturing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Understanding Manufacturing Parameter Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Site Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-1
10-2
10-4
10-9

Creating Face Milling Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1


Basic Face Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Lateral Control Face Milling Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Depth Control Face Milling Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Entry and Exit Face Milling Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Creating Volume Milling Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1


Basic Volume Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Volume Milling with Mill Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Scanning Volume Milling Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Depth and Lateral Control Volume Milling Parameters . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Stock Allowance Volume Milling Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Gathering Mill Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23


Modifying Volume Milling Toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Creating Profile Milling Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Basic Profile Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Depth and Lateral Control Profile Milling Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Lead In and Lead Out Motions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Creating Straight Cut Surface Milling Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Understanding Surface Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Straight Cut Surface Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Straight Cut Surface Milling Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Creating Surface Milling Reference Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Creating From Surface Isolines Surface Milling Sequences. . . . . . . 15-1
From Surface Isolines Surface Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Creating Cut Line Surface Milling Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Cut Line Surface Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Advanced Surface Milling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Advanced Surface Milling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Creating Roughing and Re-roughing Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Basic Roughing and Re-roughing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Roughing Scans and Entry and Exit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Step Depth and Tolerance Control Roughing Parameters . . . . . . . 18-11
Additional Scallop Height Control Roughing Parameters. . . . . . . . 18-14
Roughing Corner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
Creating Finishing Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Basic Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Editing Finishing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Creating Trajectory Milling Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Understanding Trajectory Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Creating Sketched Milling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Basic 2-Axis Trajectory Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
2-Axis Trajectory Milling Depth Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14
2-Axis Trajectory Milling Cutting Slices Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 20-18
Basic 3-Axis Trajectory Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
3-Axis Trajectory Milling Multi-Step and Multi-Pass Parameters . . 20-27
Creating Holemaking Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Understanding Holemaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Basic Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Editing Drilling Toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Creating and Using Drill Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-14
Using the Process Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
Using Process Manager Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

Editing Process Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7


Creating New Items in the Process Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
Creating and Using Manufacturing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-16

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Creating and Post-Processing CL Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1


Creating and Post-Processing CL Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2

rP
TC

Fo

al

rn

te

In
se

nl

Student Preface Using the Header

nl

In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and
the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.

se
U

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Procedure / Exercise Header:

al

Modules
Topics
Concept
Theory
Procedure
Exercise (if applicable)

Course Handbook Layout:

Course Handbook Layout


The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate
information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into
modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics,
with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:
Concept This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and
is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with
figures and bullets.

nl

Theory This section provides detailed information about content


introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not
shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional
paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.
Procedure This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to
complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused,
and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook
only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that
contain only Concept and Theory.
Exercise Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are
typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models.
Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an
associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide
and/or the online exercise HTML files.

se

The first module for certain courses is known as a process


module. Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level
processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.

Procedure / Exercise Header

rn

al

To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as labs) as


concise as possible, each begins with a header. The header lists the name
of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.
The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:

te

In

3.

Procedure/Exercise Name This is the name of the lab.


Scenario This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The
Scenario is only found in Exercises.
Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed A reminder that you should
close any open files and erase them from memory:

rP
TC

1.
2.

Click Close

Click Erase Not Displayed


and then click OK.
Folder Name This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are
stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to
the lab files is:
PTCU\CreoParametric1\functional_area_folder\topic_folder
In the example, Rounds is the functional area folder and Variable
is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to
PTCU\CreoParametric1\Round\Variable.
To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or
browser, and select Set Working Directory.
Model to Open This is the file to be opened from the working
directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to
open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If
you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead
create a new model, you will see Create New.
To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and
select Open.

Fo

4.

5.

until the icon is no longer displayed.

6.
7.

Task Name Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one
or more tasks within a lab.
Lab Steps These are the individual steps required to complete
a task.

Two other items to note for labs:


Saving Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless
otherwise stated.
Exercises Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

nl

Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you
configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab
exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a
computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such
as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1\.
Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as
the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1\.
Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric1 folder.
You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.

PROCEDURE - Student Preface Using the Header


In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo
Parametric working environment for each lab in the course.
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder

Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run


the lab exercises properly.

nl

Step 1:

EXTRUDE_1.PRT

Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer
outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.

se

1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically,
such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1.

te

rn

al

2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.


Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be
PTCU\CreoParametric1.

rP
TC

In

3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.


The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric1 folder.
You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
Step 2:

Add the Erase not Displayed icon to the Quick Access toolbar.

Fo

1. Click File > Manage Session, and cursor over Erase Not Displayed.
Right-click and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.
Step 3:

Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to
avoid any possible conflicts.

1. If you currently have files open, click Close


toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.

from the Quick Access

from the Quick Access toolbar.


2. Click Erase Not Displayed
Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.

Step 4:

Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure
and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric
working directory.

1. Notice the folder indicated in the header above.


2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser

tab from the navigator.

Click Working Directory


to view the current working directory
folder in the browser.
Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.

nl

3. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working


Directory.

In

te

rn

al

se

4. Double-click the Topic1_Folder folder to display its contents in the


browser.

rP
TC

Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the


browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and
select Set Working Directory from the browser.
Open the file for this procedure.

Fo

Step 5:

1. Notice the lab model is specified in the header above.


Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.
2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:
Read the first task.
Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial
datum display for the procedure or exercise. Complete the optional
task below to customize the In Graphics toolbar, making the
selection of the datum display options easier
Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.

Step 6:

OPTIONAL: Customize the In Graphics toolbar to show the datum


display options.

1. Right-click the In Graphics toolbar and clear the Datum Display


Filters check box.
Select the Plane Display, Axis Display, Point Display, and Csys
Display check boxes.
Click in the graphics window.

Enable only the following Datum Display types:

nl

2. The In Graphics toolbar should appear as shown.

te

rn

al

se

3. The model should now appear


as shown.

Fo

rP
TC

In

This completes the procedure.

Introduction to Manufacturing

1
nl

Module

se

Module Overview

al

Before you use Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire to machine components, it is


important to understand the complete manufacturing process and the steps
involved in this process. It is also important to understand the elements that
make up completed manufacturing models.

Objectives

In

te

rn

In this module, you learn about the Pro/ENGINEER manufacturing process.


You are also introduced to the different elements that make up manufacturing
models. You also learn how to create a simple manufacturing model and
how to set up various elements for manufacturing. Finally you learn how to
create a simple machining sequence.

Fo

rP
TC

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the Pro/ENGINEER manufacturing process.
Describe the elements that make up completed manufacturing models.
Create manufacturing models.
Create a simple machining sequence.

2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 1

Manufacturing Process Overview

nl

The manufacturing process can be divided into four high-level


steps:

se

Figure 2 Creating the


Manufacturing Environment

In

te

rn

al

Figure 1 Creating the


Manufacturing Model

rP
TC

Figure 3 Creating NC Sequences


and CL Data

Creating the Manufacturing Model

Figure 4 Post-Processing CL
Data and Machining

Fo

Creating the manufacturing model is the first step in the manufacturing


process.
You can select and copy a template manufacturing model during the
creation process.
By default, the template manufacturing model includes default datum
planes and a default coordinate system.
You can configure many other items in template manufacturing models.
For example, you can include fixtures and a configured machine tool.
Alternatively you can create an "empty" model. However, the recommended
procedure is to create the manufacturing model using a template model.

Creating the Manufacturing Environment


Configuring the manufacturing environment is the second step in the
manufacturing process. This step involves configuring a number of elements
within the manufacturing model. Here is a summary of the most important
elements.
Module 1 | Page 2

2011 PTC

te

rn

al

se

nl

Workcell This specifies the type of machine tool being used. For
example, you can specify a workcell as a 3-axis milling machine with
various machine tool parameters such as feed units, maximum spindle
speed, and travel limits in the X-, Y-, and Z-directions.
Operation Machining operations are a series of NC sequences that are
performed by a particular workcell (machine tool) and reference a particular
coordinate system. They include the following elements:
Machine coordinate system Also referred to as the machine zero
position. This specifies the program zero position in X, Y, and Z on the
machine tool.
Retract plane Also referred to as the retract surface. This specifies
the clearance level to which the tool retracts after completing an NC
sequence.
Fixtures Are parts or assemblies that can be used to hold the
component being machined. For example, you can create vise
assemblies and use them as fixtures. Note, fixtures are optional
elements and are not required to create NC sequences.
Reference model You must assemble a reference model before creating
NC sequences. The reference model represents the final machined
component. Surfaces and edges are selected from the reference model
and are used as references when creating NC sequences.
Workpiece model This represents the unmachined stock material. It is an
optional element and is not required to create NC sequences. However,
using a workpiece enables you to simulate the machining of the stock
material.

In

Creating NC Sequences and CL Data

rP
TC

The next step in the manufacturing process is to create NC sequences in the


manufacturing model; this involves the following:

Fo

Specifying a tool.
Selecting or creating geometry to machine (for example, a surface to
machine or holes to be drilled).
Specifying how the tool machines the selected geometry by editing
machining parameters (for example, specifying cut feed rate and spindle
speed).
When NC sequences have been created, it is then possible to create
Cutter Location (CL) data files. These are generated from the tool motions
within NC sequences.
Note, NC sequences are made up of a series of tool motions. In
addition, you can add specific post-processor commands for correct
NC output.

2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 3

Post-Processing CL Data and Machining


CL Data files can then be post-processed to create Machine Control Data
(MCD) files. This is done using machine-specific or generic post-processors.
You can then use MCD files to machine components on machine tools.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This course covers the necessary steps for creating machine


control data. The final step involves machining components on
machine tools and is therefore beyond the scope of this course.

Module 1 | Page 4

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Process Exercise


Objectives
After successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to:
Create manufacturing models using template manufacturing models.
Configure the manufacturing environment.
Create simple NC sequences.
Review CL data.

Erase Not Displayed

Close Window

se

Milling\NC_Process

Create a manufacturing model using a template manufacturing


model.

Step 1:

nl

You create a new manufacturing model, and then configure the manufacturing
environment. You are then able to create a simple surfacing NC sequence
and review the NC sequence.

rn

al

1. Create a new manufacturing


model.

rP
TC

In

te

Click New
in the Quick
Access toolbar.
Select the Manufacturing and
NC Assembly options.
Type BRACKET_NC in the
Name text box.
Clear the Use Default
Template check box, and click
OK.

Fo

2. Select mmns_mfg_nc, and click


OK.

2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 5

3. Ensure that the new


manufacturing model is created
with three default datum planes
and a default coordinate system.
Enable Csys Display

and

se

Create an operation, specify a workcell, and assemble a fixture.

Step 2:

nl

Plane Display

to

rn

al

1. Click Mill
from the Machine Tool Setup group.
In the Setup: Milling Work Center dialog box, click Accept
create a default 3-axis milling workcell.

In

te

2. Click Operation
from the Process group.
Select the Fixture Setup tab.

rP
TC

Click Add Fixture


.
Select MAKINO_FIXTURE.ASM, and click Open.

Fo

3. Select datum coordinate system


ASM_DEF_CSYS on the fixture
assembly.

4. Select datum coordinate system


NC_ASM_DEF_CSYS on the
manufacturing model.
Click Complete Component
.

Module 1 | Page 6

2011 PTC

5. Disable Plane Display


.
From the Graphics toolbar,
click Refit

nl

Fixtures are an optional element when configuring the


manufacturing environment. They are not required to create NC
sequences.
Specify the machine coordinate system and the retract plane.

Step 3:

In

te

rn

al

2. Select the Clearance tab.


Change Type to Plane from
the drop-down menu.
Select NC_ASM_DEF_CSYS
for the Reference.
Type 100 in the Value text box
and press ENTER.

se

1. Select datum coordinate system


NC_ASM_DEF_CSYS on the
manufacturing model.

3. Click Accept

rP
TC

You have now completed the configuration of the manufacturing


operation.

Step 4:

Assemble the reference model.

Fo

1. Click Assemble Reference


Model
.
Select BRACKET.PRT, and
click Open.
Select datum coordinate
system REF_CSYS on the
bracket model.
Select datum coordinate
system NC_ASM_DEF_CSYS
on the manufacturing model.
Click Complete Component
.

Disable Csys Display

2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 7

Step 5:

Create an NC sequence to machine a surface.

1. Select the Mill tab Steps > Pocketing.

nl
O
se
U

te

rn

al

2. In the Tool Setup dialog box,


change BALL MILL to END MILL
with the drop-down menu for
Type.
Type 20 for the tool diameter.
Type 20_0_end_mill in the
Name text box.
Click Apply.
Ensure the 20_0_end_mill tool
is selected, and then right-click
and select Select tool and
return.

Select Surface Milling


from the Milling group.
Notice that in the SEQ SETUP menu, the Tool, Parameters,
Surfaces, and Define Cut check boxes are automatically selected.
These items must be specified to create the NC sequence.
Click Done.

rP
TC

In

3. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Edit CUT_FEED to 300.
Edit STEP_OVER to 15.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1000. Click OK.

Fo

4. In the menu manager, ensure


Model is selected and click
Done.
Select the surface at the
bottom of the pocket, as
shown.
Click OK > Done/Return.
Click OK from the Cut
Definition panel.

Module 1 | Page 8

2011 PTC

nl

5. Play the resulting toolpath.


From the menu manager, click
Play Path > Screen Play.
In the Play Path dialog box,
click the CL Data bar; this
makes the CL data visible in
the dialog box.
To slow down the toolpath
simulation, click and drag the
display speed slider to the left.
Click Play .
Click Close in the Play Path
dialog box when finished.

Adjust the toolpath by editing manufacturing parameters.

al

Step 6:

se

When the toolpath simulation is finished, you can replay the


toolpath by clicking Rewind
and then clicking Play
again.

te

rn

1. Click Step Parameters


.
Edit the CUT_ANGLE value to 45.
Click OK.

Fo

rP
TC

In

2. Play the updated toolpath.


From the menu manager, click
Play Path > Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the cutting angle
of the tool in the pocket has
changed.
When finished, click Close in
the Play Path dialog box.
Click Done Seq.
3. Save the manufacturing model and erase all objects from memory.
from the Quick Access toolbar.
Click Save
Click OK in the Save Object dialog box.
Click Close Window
from the Quick Access toolbar.
Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
Click OK to erase all objects from memory.

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 9

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 1 | Page 10

2011 PTC

Creating Manufacturing Models

2
nl

Module

se

Module Overview

Creating manufacturing models is the first step in the manufacturing process.


Manufacturing models ultimately contain all manufacturing information, such
as operation information, reference models, and NC sequence information.

In

Objectives

te

rn

al

In this module, you learn how to create manufacturing models using template
manufacturing models. This is important because, by using template
manufacturing models, you can standardize the initial manufacturing model
configuration.

Fo

rP
TC

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the contents of manufacturing models.
Create manufacturing models.

2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 1

Creating Manufacturing Models


Creating manufacturing models is the first step in the
manufacturing process.
Manufacturing models contain all
manufacturing process information,
such as:

Manufacturing model assembly


file "filename".asm

nl

Operations
Workcells
NC sequences
Reference models
Workpiece models

In

te

rn

al

se

Manufacturing Models

Figure 2 Template Manufacturing


Model Options

rP
TC

Figure 1 Using Template


Manufacturing Models

Manufacturing Models

Fo

As manufacturing models are developed, they contain all manufacturing


process information, such as operations, workcells, NC sequences, reference
models, and workpiece models.
The manufacturing model assembly file is created when you create a
manufacturing model. It has the filename format "filename".asm.

The manufacturing model assembly file contains all manufacturing process


information, such as operation information and NC sequence information.
This file also contains the assembly information for reference models,
fixtures, and workpieces assembled into the manufacturing model.

Template Manufacturing Models


A template manufacturing model can be selected and copied during the
creation process. Using template manufacturing models enables you to
standardize on the initial manufacturing model configuration. If a template
model is not selected, then the initial manufacturing model is empty.
By default, the template manufacturing model includes default datum
planes and a default coordinate system.
Module 2 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Template manufacturing models are configured with either metric or


imperial units.
User-defined template manufacturing models can also be configured and
selected.

Best Practices

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Create manufacturing models using a template manufacturing model. This


ensures standardized models are used for the initial manufacturing model
configuration.

2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating Manufacturing Models


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Mfg_Models
Task 1:

CREATE NEW

Create a manufacturing model using a template manufacturing


model.

nl
O
se
U

rn

al

in the main
Click New
toolbar.
Select the Manufacturing and
NC Assembly options.
Type EXAMPLE_NC in the
Name text box.
Clear the Use Default
Template check box, and click
OK.

1. Create a new manufacturing


model.

In

te

Both metric and imperial manufacturing templates are available for


selection. Alternatively to create an empty model, you can select
Empty. You also have the option of clicking Browse and selecting
a user-defined template.

rP
TC

2. Create a manufacturing model


with metric units.
Select mmns_mfg_nc, and
click OK.

Fo

3. Disable Axis Display

, Point

Display

, and Annotation

Display

Module 2 | Page 4

2011 PTC

nl

4. Observe the new manufacturing


model is created with three
default datum planes and a
default coordinate system.

Click Close Window


the window.

from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save


from the Quick Access toolbar to close

al

Click Save
the model.

se

5. Save the manufacturing model and erase all models from memory.

te

rn

Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed


Click OK to erase all objects from memory.

Fo

rP
TC

In

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 5

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 2 | Page 6

2011 PTC

3
y

Module

nl

Configuring Operations

se

Module Overview

rn

al

Setting up for manufacturing involves configuring manufacturing operations.


You create manufacturing operations by configuring a number of elements
such as the type of machine tool (workcell), the machine zero position, and
the machine retract plane. You can also configure optional elements such
as fixtures. When you have configured an operation, you can create NC
sequences that reference the operation's specific machine tool (workcell),
and machine zero position.

In

te

In this module, you configure elements within manufacturing operations. This


involves configuring workcells, fixtures, machine zero positions, and machine
retract planes. It is important to understand why each element in an operation
is required, and how each element is configured.

rP
TC

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe elements of manufacturing operations.
Configure workcells, fixtures, machine zero positions, and machine retract
planes within operations.

2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 1

Configuring Operations
Configuring manufacturing operations forms part of the setting
up for manufacturing procedure. An operation and a machine
tool must be configured before NC sequences can be created.
Manufacturing operations contain:

Fixtures (Optional)
Machine Coordinate System
Retract Plane
NC Sequences

nl

al

se

Figure 1 Simple Fixture Assembly

te

rn

Figure 3 Machine Tool


Configuration

In

Figure 2 Machine Coordinate


System and Retract Plane

rP
TC

Manufacturing Operations

Fo

Manufacturing operations contain configured elements such as machine


zero coordinate systems and fixtures.
Manufacturing operations also contain NC sequences that reference the
configured machine tool (workcell), and the specified machine coordinate
system.
An operation consists of a number of configured elements such as:
The machine coordinate system (specified by the machine zero
position). This also specifies the direction of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes
on the machine tool.
A retract plane (or surface) which the tool retracts to between NC
sequences.
An optional fixture setup.
When these items have been specified, you can create NC sequences to
machine components assembled into the manufacturing model. These NC
sequences reference the machine tool and the machine zero position.
You cannot create NC sequences until you configure the manufacturing
operation and configure a machine tool.

Module 3 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Fixture Configuration
Fixtures are typically configured at this stage of setting up the operation.
However, they are optional elements of an operation and are not required
to complete NC sequences. Fixtures are parts or assemblies that are
assembled into manufacturing models, and they can be easily activated and
deactivated as required. Fixtures can be used as references, for example:
To specify the location of the machine coordinate system.
To locate the position of reference models in the manufacturing model.
To locate the position of workpiece models in the manufacturing model.

Machine Coordinate System and Retract Plane

nl

The machine coordinate system, often referred to as the machine zero


position, acts as the origin position for CL data output.

al

se

The machine coordinate system specifies the direction of the X-, Y-, and
Z-axes on the machine tool.
You can configure the machine coordinate system by selecting or creating
a coordinate system in the manufacturing model.
When configuring the machine coordinate system, you can reference
existing datum features in the manufacturing model, or you can reference
fixture geometry, or use reference model or workpiece geometry.

rn

The retract plane (or surface) specifies the level to which the tool retracts
to between cutting motions.

rP
TC

In

te

You can specify the retract plane at the operation level, and then modify its
position for specific NC sequences as required.
Note, depending on your requirements, you can specify the retract position
to be a plane, cylinder, sphere, or a custom-made surface.
By default, the retract plane is configured along the Z-axis of the machine
coordinate system. You can select an alternative reference if required.

Machine Tool Configuration

Fo

When configuring a machine tool (workcell), the minimum configuration


involves specifying:
Machine Name
For example: Fadal/Fanuc/Makino
Machine Type
Milling/Turning/Mill-Turn
Number of Axes
This can be 2, 3, 4, or 5
Dependent on machine type

Best Practices
Where appropriate, it is recommended to assemble fixtures before specifying
the machine coordinate system or assembling both reference models and
workpiece models. This enables these items to reference any fixtures if
required.
2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Configuring Operations


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Operations_Configure
Task 1:

OPERATION_SETUP.ASM

Create an operation and specify a 3-axis milling machine tool as


the workcell.

O
se

al

2. Click Mill
from the Machine
Tool Setup group.
Type 3-AXIS in the Name text
box.
In the Setup: Milling Work
Center dialog box, click
Accept Settings .

nl

Plane Display

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display type:

In

Assemble a fixture.

rP
TC

Task 2:

te

rn

Notice the default machine type is Mill, and the default number of
axes is set to 3-Axis. You can change these and other machine
tool settings as required.

1. Click Operation
from the Process group.
Select the Fixture Setup tab.

Fo

Click Assemble Reference Model


.
Select FADAL_BED.PRT, and click Open.

2. Create the first assembly


constraint.
Select datum plane
NC_ASM_TOP.
Select the top surface of
FADAL_BED.PRT, as shown.

Module 3 | Page 4

2011 PTC

3. Create the second assembly


constraint.
Select datum plane
NC_ASM_FRONT.
Select the front surface of
FADAL_BED.PRT, as shown.

Task 3:

nl
O

. Enable Csys Display

6. Disable Plane Display

in the dashboard.

se

5. Click Complete Component

4. Create the third assembly


constraint.
Select datum plane
NC_ASM_RIGHT.
Select the hidden left surface
of FADAL_BED.PRT, as
shown.

rn

al

Specify the machine zero coordinate system and the retract plane.

In

te

1. Select the box next to Coordinate System


in the dashboard.
Select the datum coordinate system MACHINE_CSYS on the
fixture model.

rP
TC

Notice a coordinate system named NC_MACHINE_CSYS is copied


into the manufacturing model.

Fo

2. Select the Clearance tab.


In the Retract box, select
Plane from the Type
drop-down menu.
Select NC_MACHINE_CSYS
for the Reference.
Type 150 and press ENTER
for the Value.
3. Select the Properties tab.
Notice the name defaults to OP010; you could specify a different
name at this point.

4. Click Complete Feature

in the SETUP: Operation dashboard.

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 5

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 3 | Page 6

2011 PTC

4
y

Module

nl

Using Reference Models

se

Module Overview

al

Reference models are assembled into manufacturing models, where they


represent finished machined components. You can select model geometry,
such as surfaces and edges, from reference models and you can use them
as references when creating NC sequences. If a reference model changes,
then all associated NC sequences are updated to reflect the changes.

In

Objectives

te

rn

In this module, you learn how to assemble reference models using different
options. These options provide you with a flexible approach to using
reference models.

Fo

rP
TC

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the purpose of reference models.
Assemble reference models using different methods.

2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 1

Using Reference Models


It is important to understand how reference models are used
in manufacturing assemblies.
Reference models represent the
finished machined component. For
example, this can be:

nl

A component machined from solid.


A machined mold core.
A machined casting.

Creating reference model options:

Figure 1 Reference Model


Examples

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

Same Model
Inherited
Merged by Reference

Reference Models

Reference models, often referred to as design models, represent the finished


machined component. Model geometry, such as surfaces and edges,
is selected from the reference model and is used as references when
creating NC sequences. If the reference model changes, then all associated
machining toolpaths are updated to reflect the changes. The reference model
can be a part or assembly and can take many forms, for example:
A component machined from solid. In this case, it is likely all component
geometry would be machined.
A machined mold core. In this case, it is likely only the mold core geometry
would be machined.
A machined casting. Normally only certain surfaces on the casting would be
machined. In addition, holes would be drilled, bored, or tapped as required.
Module 4 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Creating Reference Model Options


You can assemble reference models using the reference model tool. There
are three options available when assembling your reference model.

se

nl

Same Model
In this case, the selected model is used directly as the reference model,
and no new parts are created.
Inherited
In this case, a new reference part is created. The reference part inherits
all geometry and feature information from the original design part. You
can specify the geometry and the feature data that you want to modify
on the inherited part without changing the original part. Inheritance
provides greater freedom to modify the reference part without changing
the design part.
Merged by Reference
In this case, a new reference part is created. The new reference part
contains an external merge feature; this feature contains all geometry
and datum features which have been copied from the original design
part. All layer information is also copied into the new reference part.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

If an assembly is selected as the reference model, then the


assembly is used directly as the reference model, and there is no
option to use the Inherited or Merge by Reference options.

2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Using Reference Models


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Reference_Models
Task 1:

CASTING.ASM

Assemble the reference model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display type: Plane Display

O
se
U
al

te

rn

3. Create the first assembly


constraint.
Select datum plane
NC_ASM_TOP in the model
tree.
If necessary, expand the
CASTING.PRT feature list in
the model tree.
Select datum plane TOP on
CASTING.PRT in the model
tree.

nl

from the Components group.


2. Click Assemble Reference Model
Select CASTING.PRT, and click Open.

Fo

rP
TC

In

4. Create the second assembly


constraint.
Select datum plane
NC_ASM_FRONT in the
model tree.
Select datum plane FRONT on
CASTING.PRT in the model
tree.

5. Create the third assembly


constraint.
Select datum plane
NC_ASM_RIGHT in the
model tree.
Select datum plane RIGHT on
CASTING.PRT in the model
tree.

Module 4 | Page 4

2011 PTC

6. Click Complete Component


in the dashboard.
7. Disable Plane Display

nl

In this case, the reference model has been assembled to the default
datum planes in the manufacturing model. However, it is possible
to configure an operation and assemble a fixture before assembling
the reference model. This would give you the option of assembling
the reference model to the fixture if required.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 5

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 4 | Page 6

2011 PTC

5
y

Module

nl

Using Workpiece Models

se

Module Overview

al

Workpieces represent the unmachined stock material in a manufacturing


model. They are optional components within a manufacturing model;
however, if they are used, then you can simulate the machining of workpieces
when creating NC sequences. Workpieces can be standard stock billets or
you can configure them to represent models such as castings.

rP
TC

Objectives

In

te

rn

In this module, you create workpieces using different methods. You learn how
to create workpieces using the Automatic Workpiece option. This enables
you to easily create simple rectangular or round workpieces. You also learn
how to create workpieces using the Inherited Features option. This enables
you to create workpieces by inheriting geometry from a selected part.

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the purpose of workpiece models.
Create workpiece models using different methods.

2011 PTC

Module 5 | Page 1

Using Workpiece Models


It is important to understand how workpiece models are used
in manufacturing assemblies.
Workpieces represent unmachined
stock material, for example:
Stock Billets
Castings

nl

Workpiece Features:

rn

al

se

Enable machining simulation of


workpiece.
As-machined versions.
No machining outside workpiece
boundaries.
Workpiece display.

In

Workpiece Options:

te

Figure 1 Workpiece Examples

Fo

rP
TC

Create an automatic workpiece.


Assemble using Same Model
option.
Assemble with inherited features .
Assemble with merged features.
Create a manual workpiece.
Figure 2 Automatic Workpiece

Workpiece Models
Workpieces represent the unmachined stock material. They are optional
components within a manufacturing model; however, if they are used, then
you can simulate the machining of workpieces when creating NC sequences.
Workpieces can be standard stock billets or they can represent castings.
Using workpieces provides you with a number of capabilities:
You can simulate the cutting tool machining the workpiece.
After creating each toolpath, you can update the workpiece to display an
as-machined version of the workpiece.
Unless you specify otherwise, there is no machining outside the workpiece
boundaries.
Module 5 | Page 2

2011 PTC

The workpiece is displayed in green to help you visually distinguish


between the workpiece and the reference model geometry. In addition,
when the display style is set to shaded, the workpiece is displayed as
semi-transparent. This enables you to view the reference model geometry
which would normally be obscured by the workpiece.

Workpiece Options
You can assemble or create a workpiece in a manufacturing model. A
number of options are available:

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Create an automatic workpiece This enables you to create a rectangular


or round workpiece depending on your requirements. A dashboard
interface enables you to easily control the size and position of the
workpiece relative to the reference model.
Assemble a workpiece using the Same Model option This enables you to
assemble an existing part into the manufacturing model as the workpiece.
Assemble a workpiece with features inherited from a selected part. The
new workpiece inherits geometry and feature information from the selected
part. At any time, you can specify the geometry and the feature data that
you want to modify on the workpiece without changing the original part.
Inheritance provides greater freedom to modify the workpiece without
changing the original part.
Assemble a workpiece with features merged from a selected part. In this
case, a new workpiece part is created. The new workpiece contains an
external merge feature, and this feature contains all geometry and datum
features which have been copied from the originally selected part. All layer
information is also copied into the new workpiece.
Create a manual workpiece This enables you to create a new workpiece
in the manufacturing model by manually creating features and geometry
as required.

2011 PTC

Module 5 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Using Workpiece Models


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Workpiece_Models
Task 1:

BRACKET.ASM

Create the workpiece.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


from the Components group.

O
se
U

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

3. In the dashboard, select the


Options tab.
Type 20 in the +X text box.
Type 20 in the X text box.
Type 20 in the +Y text box.
Type 20 in the Y text box.
Type 10 in the +Z text box, and
press ENTER.
Observe the workpiece
preview geometry update, as
shown.

nl

2. Click Automatic Workpiece

4. In the dashboard, select the Properties tab.


Type BRACKET_WRK_AUTO in the Workpiece Name text box,
and press ENTER.

Module 5 | Page 4

2011 PTC

5. Click Complete Feature


in
the dashboard.
Observe the new workpiece
displayed in green in the
manufacturing model.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 5 | Page 5

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 5 | Page 6

2011 PTC

6
y

Module

nl

Creating and Using NC Model Assemblies

se

Module Overview

rn

al

You can place previously created NC model assemblies, consisting of a


reference model and a workpiece, directly into manufacturing models. There
is no need to position components within the manufacturing model, and the
models within the NC model assembly are automatically classified correctly
as a reference model and a workpiece. As such, NC model assemblies
provide an alternative means of creating manufacturing models.

Objectives

In

te

You can create NC model assemblies by adding a reference model to an


assembly, and then configuring a workpiece using the create stock dashboard
options.

Fo

rP
TC

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the purpose of NC model assemblies.
Create NC model assemblies.
Use NC model assemblies in manufacturing models.

2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 1

Creating and Using NC Model Assemblies


You can create NC model assemblies that consist of a reference
model and a workpiece. You can then use NC model assemblies
by assembling them into manufacturing models.
Using NC Model Assemblies

Create Stock Options:


Workpiece Shape
Overall Dimensions
Offset Dimensions
Rotation Offsets

Alternative means of creating


manufacturing models.
Place directly into manufacturing
models.
Components classified automatically.

al

se

nl

Creating NC Model Assemblies

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Figure 2 Configuring the Workpiece

Figure 1 Create Stock Options

Figure 3 Resulting Manufacturing


Model

Fo

Creating NC Model Assemblies

You can create NC model assemblies that consist of a reference model and a
workpiece. You must first add a reference model to the assembly. You can
then create a workpiece using the Create Stock dashboard.
Create Stock Dashboard This dashboard enables you to configure
rectangular and round workpiece shapes depending on your requirements.
A number of options are available including the following:
Workpiece Shape You can specify rectangular or round.
Overall Dimensions You can specify the overall dimensions for the
workpiece.
Offset Dimensions You can specify offset dimensions on the X-, Y-,
and Z-axes, for rectangular workpieces, and length and diameter for
round workpieces. The offset dimensions can be edited directly or by
using drag handles.
Module 6 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Rotation Offsets You can rotate the workpiece on the X-, Y-, and
Z-axes from its default orientation.

Using NC Model Assemblies

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

NC model assemblies provide an alternative means of creating manufacturing


models. You can use previously created NC model assemblies by placing
them directly into manufacturing models. There is no need to assemble
components within the manufacturing model. The models are automatically
classified correctly as a reference model and a workpiece within the NC
model assembly.

2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using NC Model Assemblies


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\NC_Assemblies
Task 1:

Create an NC model assembly.

1. Create a new NC model


assembly.

nl
O
se
U

al

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

2. Add the reference model.


Select COVER.PRT and click
Open.
Notice that the reference
model is added to the
assembly.

Click New
in the ribbon.
Select the Assembly and NC
Model options.
Type COVER_NC in the Name
text box.
Click OK.

Module 6 | Page 4

2011 PTC

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

3. Configure a rectangular stock workpiece.


From the menu manager, click Create Stock.
In the dashboard, click Options.
Type 135 in the X Total text box, and press ENTER.
Type 40 in the Y Total text box, and press ENTER.
Type 110 in the Z Total text box, and press ENTER.
Notice that the workpiece size updates, as shown. You can edit the
workpiece size using drag handles, or edit the dimensions directly
on the model.

Fo

4. Name the workpiece.


In the dashboard, click
Properties.
Type COVER_NC_WP in the
Workpiece Name text box, and
press ENTER.
Click Complete Feature
in
the dashboard.
Observe the new workpiece
displayed in green in the NC
model assembly.
5. Save the NC model assembly and erase all objects from memory.
Click Save

from the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK.

Click Close Window


from the Quick Access toolbar.
Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
Click OK to erase all objects from memory.

2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 5

Task 2:

Use an NC model assembly in a manufacturing model.

1. Create a new manufacturing model.

nl
O
se
U

rn

2. Add the NC model assembly.


Click the Components
drop-down menu.
Click Manufacturing
Assembly > Assemble
and Classify.
Select COVER_NC.ASM and
click Open.
Notice that the NC model
assembly is added to the
manufacturing model.

Click New
in the ribbon.
Select the Manufacturing and NC Assembly options.
Type COVER in the Name text box.
Clear the Use Default Template check box. Click OK.
Select Empty in the New File Options dialog box. Click OK.

al

rP
TC

In

te

3. Review the model tree structure.


Expand COVER_NC.ASM in
the model tree.
Observe the resulting model
structure in the model tree, as
shown.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 6 | Page 6

2011 PTC

7
y

Module

nl

Creating and Configuring Workcells

se

Module Overview

A workcell specifies the type of machine used when you create NC


sequences, for example, mill, lathe, or mill/turn. You must specify a workcell
before you can create NC sequences.

te

rn

al

Workcells consist of a number of different elements that describe the


capabilities of the machine tool, including post-processor options, multiple
axis output options, site parameter file options, and the ability to configure
a PPRINT table.

In

In this module, you configure a milling workcell. This involves specifying


various workcell options, retrieving a site parameter file, configuring a
PPRINT table, and configuring the workcell travel limits.

rP
TC

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the elements that make up workcells.
Create workcells and configure various workcell options.

2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 1

Creating and Configuring Workcells


The workcell specifies the type of machine used when creating
NC sequences, for example, mill, lathe, or mill/turn. You must
specify a workcell before you can create NC sequences.
Machine Tool Elements

Name
Type Mill, Lathe, Mill/Turn, or
Wire EDM
Number of Axes
Post-Processor
Probing Option

Output Tab Options


Multiple Axis Output
Parameters
Properties
CL Command Output
Milling Capability
Cutter Compensation
Tools Tab
Travel Tab
Cycles Tab
Assembly Tab

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Workcell Configuration

Figure 1 Machine Tool Setup


Dialog Box

Workcell Configuration

Fo

You configure a workcell within the Machine Tool Setup dialog box. You
can specify many different options that describe the type of machine tool
configuration. You must specify the workcell name and the workcell type.
This can be Mill, Lathe, Mill/Turn, or Wire EDM. The number of axes you can
specify is dependent on the workcell type.
For Mill 3 axis (default), 4 axis, or 5 axis.
For Lathe 1 turret (default) or 2 turrets.
For Mill/Turn 2 axis, 3 axis, 4 axis, or 5 axis (default).
For Wire EDM 2 axis (default) or 4 axis.
You can also specify a number of other items including the controller name.

Machine Tool Elements


The Setup: Work Center dialog box has a number of tabs that enable you to
configure different optional elements of a machine tool.
Module 7 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

The Output tab has a number of options including:


Cutter location (CL) Command Output Options You can specify how
the FROM, LOADTL, COOLNT/OFF, and SPINDL/OFF statements are
output in CL data files.
Multiple Axis Output Options These options are only accessible for a
mill type machine tool when you set the number of axes to 4 axis.
Use Rotation When you select this option, the system outputs the
applicable TRANS and ROTABL commands to specify linear and
rotational transformations. If this option is not selected (default), all
CL data is transformed and output in the coordinates of the program
zero coordinate system.
Rotation Output Mode Only available when you select Use Rotation.
Controls output of ROTABL statements. The values are: Incremental
(default) and Absolute.
Rotation Direction Only available when you select Use Rotation.
Enables you to specify the direction of rotation. You can also specify
the rotation to be about the A axis or B axis.
Cutter Compensation When you expand this field, the following output
cutter position options become available:
Tool Center Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the
tool center.
Tool Edge Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the
cutting edge of the tool.
Parameters Tab Specifies the maximum spindle speed, and the spindle
horsepower. As well as the rapid feed rate units and the rapid feed rate.
Tools Tab Specifies the time needed to change a tool, in seconds. You
can also access the Tool Setup dialog box to configure tools associated
with the machine tool.
Travel Tab Specifies the travel limits and the stroke for the machine
tool along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. Note, values for the travel limits along
the axes should be the actual dimensions that indicate the extent of the
machine tool workspace relative to the Program Zero coordinate system. If
you output CL data that exceeds the defined limits, an information window
appears, listing the values of the limits that have been exceeded and their
corresponding values.
Properties Tab Enables you to specify the location of the machine, and
type comments associated with the machine tool in a text box.
Cycles Tab Enables you to configure custom cycles for holemaking.
Machine Assembly Tab Specifies the machine assembly to be used when
displaying tool motion on the machine tool.

2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating and Configuring Workcells


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Workcells
Task 1:

MILL_WORKCELL.ASM

Configure and save a mill workcell.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types: Csys Display
.

and Plane Display

O
se

In

te

rn

al

3. Configure the required options.


Type 4_AXIS_MILL in the
Machine Name text box.
Select 4 Axis from the Number
of Axes drop-down list.
Notice that the Rotation
Options section appears in
the Machine Tool Setup dialog
box, as shown.

menu, and select Mill

nl

2. In the Machine Tool Setup group,


click the Work Center drop-down

Fo

rP
TC

4. Configure the Rotation Options.


Select the Use Rotation check
box.
Select Absolute from the
Rotation Mode drop-down list.

5. Configure Commands Options.


Select Only at Start from the
FROM drop-down list.

6. Observe the Output cutter


position options.

Module 7 | Page 4

2011 PTC

7. Associate a site parameter file with the workcell.


Click the Parameters tab.
Click the Defaults button.
Click Current Dir > Mill from the menu manager.
Select 4_AXIS_MIL.SIT, and click Open.
Notice the 4_axis_mil.sit file was read in successfully. This file
configures the default manufacturing parameter values used in NC
sequences.
Click Done from the menu manager.

se

nl

8. Configure a PPRINT table.


Click the PPRINT button.
Click Create from the menu manager.
Click the OPERATION_COMMENTS item, and select the Yes
option at the bottom of the window.
Edit the following items to Yes.

al

Parameter Name

Option
Yes

TOOL_TABLE

Yes

rn

OPERATION_COMMENTS

Yes

NC_SEQUENCE_NAME

Yes

In

te

ONLY_OUTPUT_USED_TOOLS

rP
TC

Click OK to close the PPRINT window.


In the menu manager, click Save and press ENTER to save the
PPRINT table (accept the default name).
Click Done/Return.

Fo

9. Configure the workcell travel


limits.
Select the Travel tab.
Configure the travel limits, as
shown.

10. Save the workcell.


in the Setup: Milling Work Center dialog box.
Click Accept
Select the Work Center drop-down menu from the Machine Tool
Setup group.
Click Save Work Center.
This completes the procedure.
2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 5

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 7 | Page 6

2011 PTC

Creating and Configuring Tools

8
nl

Module

se

Module Overview

al

Creating tools is an essential step in the manufacturing process. You must


configure a tool for each NC sequence you create. You can create tools
when the workcell is created or you can configure them as needed for each
NC sequence. Once you configure a tool, you can store the information
and use it again.

In

te

rn

There are three different tool types: standard, solid, and sketched. Each type
of tool is created in a different way and is designed for a specific purpose.
It is important to understand the differences between each type of tool and
when you should use them.

rP
TC

In this module, you describe the differences between the different tool types
and create different types of milling tools.

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the differences between the different tool types: standard, solid,
and sketched.
Create standard and solid tools through the configuration of tool parameters.
Use cutting data to configure optimum tool feeds and speeds based on
stock material.

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 1

Understanding Milling Tools


There are three different tool types: standard, solid, and
sketched. It is important to understand the differences between
each type of tool and when you should use them.
Tool Types

Standard
Solid
Sketched

nl

Tool Tip Position

se

Along centerline of tool.


Specifies X-, Y-, and Z-positions
for CL data.
Tool position based on machined
model geometry.

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

Figure 1 Machining an
Angled Surface

Fo

Figure 2 Tool Tip Locations

Tool Types

You can configure tools when creating workcells or you can configure them
as needed when creating NC sequences. Once you configure a tool, you
can store the information and use it again. There are three different milling
tool types: standard, solid, and sketched. Each type of tool is created in a
different way and is designed for a specific purpose.
Standard tools You can use standard tools when no special tool
representation is required. These tools are configured within the Tool
Setup dialog box.
Solid tools You can use solid tools when you need to enhance the tool
display and check for interference between the tool and workpiece when
reviewing toolpaths.
Sketched tools You typically use sketched tools when a non-standard
tool shape or an alternative tool control point is required, for example,
Module 8 | Page 2

2011 PTC

during trajectory milling. You can, for example, create a sketched tool for
machining slots.

Tool Tip Position

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

For standard milling tools, the tool tip position is defined along the centerline
of the tool, and at the lowest point of the tool geometry (see examples).
You can use this tool tip position for calculating the tool position in X-, Y-,
and Z-coordinates when creating CL (cutter location) data.
Pro/ENGINEER calculates the resulting tool position based on the model
geometry being machined, the tool geometry, and any manufacturing
parameters that may affect the resulting tool tip position (for example, stock
allowances).

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 3

Creating Standard Milling Tools


You configure standard milling tools by specifying tool
parameters. It is important to specify the correct tool parameters
to obtain the desired tool configuration.
Configuring Tools

Tools configured by specifying tool


parameters.
Available tool type control
parameters:
Milling or drilling
Parameter values control resulting
tool shapes in:
Length
Cutter_Diam
Toolpath display based on
parameter values.

Tool Setup Dialog Box


General Tab
Tool Name
Tool Type
Tool Parameter Values
Tool Holder Dimensions
Settings Tab
Tool Number
Offset Number
Gauge Lengths (X and Z)
Tool Tables
Display tool information.
Output tool loading information
to CL data files.

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Standard Tools Theory

Figure 2 Tool Table Information

Figure 1 Tool Geometry Parameters

Fo

Saving Tools
Tool Libraries

Standard Tools Theory

You create standard tools by configuring tool parameters within the Tool
Setup dialog box.
The type of tool, for example milling or drilling, determines the tool
cross-section and therefore which parameters are available for
configuration.
The tool parameter values control the tool shape, for example:
Length
Cutter_Diam
Note, when playing a toolpath, the tool is displayed based on the parameter
values.

Module 8 | Page 4

2011 PTC

Configuring Tools
You can create, delete, or edit tools using the Tool Setup dialog box. A
number of tabs are available within the dialog box that enable you to configure
different types of tool information.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

General In the general tab, a graphic image of the tool appears during
configuration. You can configure the tool name and tool type. Many
different standard tool types are available for selection. The selected tool
type determines the displayed tool shape.
When the tool type has been specified, you can then configure the tool
geometry parameter values that specify the tool dimensions.
When configuring the tool geometry, you can also configure tool holder
dimensions. This provides you with a visual representation of the tool
holder when you review a toolpath. Tool holder dimensions are also
used for automatic gouge avoidance in trajectory, straight cut surface
milling, isolines surface milling, roughing, re-roughing, finishing, and
corner-machining NC sequences.
Settings You can specify a number of items relating to the tool table,
including:
Tool Number This corresponds to the number field in a tool table,
which specifies the tool's pocket number.
Offset Number This corresponds to the offset field in a tool table, which
supplies a value for the gauge length register.
Gauge X Length and Gauge Z Length Optional parameters used to
create length qualifiers in the LOADTL or TURRET statements.
Tool Tables Provide you with tool information which appears in the Tool
Setup dialog box.
You can use tool tables to pass tool loading information into CL data
files. For example, you can output LOADTL and OSETNO commands
from a tool table.
When you create or retrieve tools in a workcell, the tool_id (tool name) is
checked and if the tool does not already exist in the tool table then it is
appended at the end of the table.
As tools are added to the tool table, the tool position (tool number)
automatically increments by one with respect to the last tool in the
table. You can manually edit the tool number to change its position in
the tool table, if required.

Saving Tools
You can save tool parameter information as files and reuse the tools in
different NC sequences and in different manufacturing models.
Saving a tool creates an XML format file. For example, tool_name.xml.
Note old format tool parameter files are also recognized. These are:
.tpm for Pro/ENGINEER release 12 to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 2.0.
.tprm for pre-Pro/ENGINEER release 12.

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 5

Tool Parameter Libraries

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

You can create your own tool library, where all the tool parameter files
are stored.
This enables you to access a standard set of tools for retrieval into
manufacturing processes, for modifying, or for setting up new tools.

Module 8 | Page 6

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Standard Milling Tools


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Tools_Standard
Task 1:

STD_TOOLS.ASM

Create standard tools.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types: Plane Display

nl

and Csys Display

se
U

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

3. Create an end mill tool.


Click File > New in the Tool
Setup dialog box.
Select END MILL from the
Type drop-down list.
Type FEM_20_0 in the Name
text box.
Type CARBIDE in the Material
text box.
Type 2 in the Number of Flutes
text box.
Edit the geometry parameters,
as shown.
Click the Apply button.
Notice the tool is added to the
tool table, as shown.

from
2. Click Cutting Tools
the Machine Tool Setup group, to
open the Tool Setup dialog box.

You can use the Material and Number of Flutes parameters with a
machinability database to determine cut feed and spindle speed.

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 7

nl

4. Edit the Settings tab.


Select the Settings tab.
Notice that the tool number
is already configured
automatically as 1.
Type 1 in the Offset Number
text box.
Click the Apply button to
update the tool information.
Click Yes to change the tool
description.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

6. Display the tool geometry.


Select the General tab.
Click Hide Details, and notice
that the tool geometry is no
longer displayed.
Click Show Details to display
the tool geometry again.
In the Tool Setup dialog box,
.
click Display Tool
Click Close to close the tool
display window.

se

5. In the Tool Setup dialog box, click Save Tool


to save the tool.
A file named fem_20_0.xml is saved in the working directory.

Module 8 | Page 8

2011 PTC

nl
O
se
U

In

te

rn

al

Click New Tool


in the Tool
Setup dialog box.
Select DRILLING from the
Type drop-down list.
Notice that the tool geometry
graphic updates.
Type DRILL_10_0 in the
Name text box.
Type HSS in the Material text
box.
Edit the geometry parameters,
as shown.
Select the Settings tab.
Type 3 in the Tool Number text
box.
Type 3 in the Offset Number
text box.
Click the Apply button, to
update the tool information.
Notice that the tool is added to
the tool table, as shown.

7. Create a drilling tool.

Fo

rP
TC

8. Configure the tool table columns.


Click Customize Columns
in the Tool Setup dialog
box.
Select the TOOL OFFSET
NUMBER row in the Column
Setup Builder dialog box.
Click Move Up .
Click OK.
Notice that the tool table
updates.

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 9

Creating Solid Model Milling Tools


You can use solid model milling tools to enhance CL data display
and check for interference when verifying toolpaths.
Solid Model Milling Tools Theory

Use parts or assemblies.


Play toolpaths:
View solid tool.
Check for interference.

Figure 1 Tool Geometry


Parameters

se

Figure 2 Tool Relations

al

Using Solid Model Milling Tools

rn

Create part or assembly.


Create tool geometry.
Create coordinate system.
Associate dimensions with tool
parameters.
Configure parameters to
correspond to tool parameters.

nl

Creating Solid Model Milling Tools

Figure 3 Enhanced Tool Display

rP
TC

In

te

Information transferred from solid


model to tool parameters.
Retrieve tool:
By Reference.
By Copy.

Solid Model Milling Tools Theory

Fo

You can create solid model tools as assemblies or parts. When playing
toolpaths, you can view these solid tools. You can also use the solid tools
to interactively check for interference between the tool and the component
being machined. When you use solid model tools, you have the option to
display the default section or the solid model tool.

Creating Solid Model Milling Tools


You need to complete the following steps to use solid models as tools when
creating NC sequences.
Create a part or assembly with the tool's name.
Create the desired tool geometry in the solid model.
Create a coordinate system in the model, and name it TIP. For milling
and holemaking tools, the Z-axis of the coordinate system must point to
the tool. This coordinate system represents the tool tip (often referred to
as the control point). This point specifies the X-, Y-, and Z-positions for
the tool in NC sequences.
Module 8 | Page 10

2011 PTC

Associate solid model dimensions with tool parameters. You can do this by
changing dimension symbols to correspond to tool parameter names. For
example, length, cutter_diam, and corner_radius.
Configure solid model parameters to correspond to tool parameters. For
example, tool_material and num_of_teeth. You can use the tool_material
and num_of_teeth parameters with a machinability database to determine
cut feed and spindle speed.

Using Solid Model Milling Tools

You can use solid model tools in NC sequences by retrieving them in the Tool
Setup dialog box. Model dimensions and parameter values are automatically
transferred into the tool configuration parameters.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

During the tool configuration process, you have two options when retrieving
solid model tools:
By Reference You can directly associate the solid model with the tool
configuration. You cannot directly modify the tool parameters using
this option. However, if you modify the stored solid model, then all the
manufacturing data is updated when you regenerate the manufacturing
model.
By Copy You can copy the tool information into the manufacturing
model. You can directly modify the tool parameters in the Tool Setup
dialog box. Any changes to the stored solid model do not affect the
manufacturing model.

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Model Milling Tools


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Tools_Solid
Task 1:

SOLID_TOOLS.ASM

Review a solid tool model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types: Plane Display
.

and Csys Display

O
se
U
al

In

te

rn

3. In the model tree, select the


REVOLVE feature, right-click,
and select Edit.
Observe the model
dimensions, as shown.

nl

2. From the Quick Access toolbar,


click Open
.
If necessary, select Working
Directory from the Common
Folders side of the File Open
panel.
Select FEM_15_0_SOLID.
PRT and click Open.

Fo

rP
TC

Notice that the coordinate system is named TIP. This represents the
tool tip (often referred to as the control point). This point specifies
the X-, Y-, and Z-positions for the tool in NC sequences.

Module 8 | Page 12

2011 PTC

y
nl
O
se
U

rn

al

4. Review the model relations and


symbolic dimension values.
Click the Tools tab.
Select Relations from the
Model Intent group.
Notice the relations, as shown.
These relations assign a
material to the tool model and
set the number of teeth.
Observe the model dimension
symbols, as shown.
Note, the dimension symbols
cutter_diam and length have
been changed from their
default values. This creates a
link between these dimensions
and the corresponding tool
parameters.
Click OK to close the Relations
dialog box.

In

te

from the
5. Click Close Window
Quick Access toolbar, to return
to the manufacturing model.

rP
TC

6. Click Cutting Tools


from
the Machine Tool Setup group, to
open the Tool Setup dialog box.

Fo

7. Create an end mill tool.


Click File > New in the Tool
Setup dialog box.
Click File > Open Tool Library
> By Reference in the Tool
Setup dialog box.
Select FEM_15_0_SOLID.
PRT and click Open.
Notice that the tool parameters
have been assigned from the
solid model, as shown.

Notice that the tool solid model appears next to the tool geometry
parameters.

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 13

In

nl
O
se
U

te

rn

al

9. Edit the Settings tab.


Select the Settings tab.
Notice that the tool number
is already configured
automatically as 1.
Type 1 in the Offset Number
text box.
Click the Apply button, to
update the tool information.
Click Yes to change the tool
description.
Observe the information in the
tool table, as shown.

8. Display the solid tool geometry.


In the Tool Setup dialog box,
click Display Tool
.
Notice that the solid tool model
appears in a separate window.
Click Close to close the tool
display window.

to store the tool.

rP
TC

10. In the Tool Setup dialog box, click Save


Click OK in the Tool Setup dialog box.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 14

2011 PTC

Creating and Using Tool Cutting Data


You can use cutting data stored within tools to transfer
optimum feed, speed, and depth of cut parameter values into
NC sequences.
Creating and Storing Cutting Data

Optimize parameter values


Data based on:
Workpiece material
Tool
Application
Roughing/finishing

Two sets of data:


Workpiece material list
Mfg_wp_material_list.xml
Tool cutting data
tool_name.xml
Alternative methods:
Material directories
Use .tpm tool files

se

nl

Cutting Data Theory

Using Cutting Data

Fo

al

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Figure 1 Cut Data Tab

Copy from Tool option


Parameter relations
Mfg_param_auto_copy_from_
tool configuration option

Figure 2 Resulting Data In tool_name.xml File

Cutting Data Theory


You can create cutting data for tools, enabling you to configure optimum
feed rates, spindle speeds, and depth-of-cut. This data can then be passed
into NC sequences.
The cutting data is based on the material that you are machining, the
specific tool you are using, and the application, which can be either
roughing or finishing.

Creating and Storing Cutting Data


You can create cutting data by specifying different stock materials for
machining, and by specifying feed, speed, and depth of cut data for each
2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 15

tool. Within each tool file, you need to specify different cutting data for each
different stock material.
You need to create two sets of data: an .xml file listing the workpiece materials
and a series of .xml files one for each different tool you want to use.

Mfg_wp_material_list .xml You store the list of workpiece (stock) materials


within this file. You can create this file from the Operation Setup dialog box.
You can then manually add more materials to the file, as required.
Tool_name.xml You configure feed, speed, and depth of cut data within
these files. You can specify cut data for more than one workpiece material.
You can configure the cut data information using the Tool Setup dialog box,
and save the cut data when you save the tool.

nl

An alternative method involves configuring cutting data information in a


directory structure with different directories for each material, and different
text files for each tool. This method enables you to use pre-Pro/ENGINEER
Wildfire 2.0 tool data and cutting data stored as .tpm files.

se

Using Cutting Data

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

You can pass the feed, speed, and depth of cut data into manufacturing
parameters of an NC sequence. You can achieve this using a number
of methods:
You can manually transfer parameter values using the Copy from Tool
option when configuring parameters in the parameter tree.
You can automatically transfer parameter values through relations, either
in a parameter site file or as a parameter value in the parameter tree.
For example, you can specify the relation STEP_DEPTH =
TOOL_ROUGH_AXIAL_DEPTH. This controls the value of the
STEP_DEPTH parameter in an NC sequence.
You can use the mfg_param_auto_copy_from_tool configuration option
to copy parameters from a tool into the parameter tree of an NC
sequence.

Module 8 | Page 16

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using Tool Cutting Data


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Tools_Cutting-Data
Task 1:

CUTTING_DATA.ASM

Create cutting data when configuring a tool.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: Plane Display

2. Configure the workpiece material.

se

Click Operation
.
Select the Options tab in the dashboard.
Click the New button.
Type aluminum in the Stock Material text box.

nl

and Csys Display

Click Accept Changes

in the dashboard.

In

te

rn

al

Click Accept Changes

rP
TC

You can manually add more materials to the mfg_wp_material_list.


xml file as required. This enables you to select from more than
one workpiece material.
to open the Tool Setup dialog box.

Fo

3. Click Tool Manager

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 17

y
nl
O
se
U

al

4. Configure cutting data for a drill


tool.
Ensure the DRILL_12_0 tool
is selected.
The tool geometry has been
configured, but cut data has
not been configured.
Select the Cut Data tab.
Notice aluminum is selected
from the Stock Material
drop-down list.
Type 500 in the Speed text
box.
Type 120 in the Feed text box.
Click the Apply button.
Click Yes to save the changes
to the tool.

te

rn

You can use the cutting data to specify optimum speed and feed
parameters when using this tool in NC sequences.

Fo

rP
TC

In

5. In the Tool Setup dialog box, click Save


to save the updated tool
information.
Note, the saved drill_12_0.xml file now contains feed and speed
information, as shown.

Module 8 | Page 18

2011 PTC

Task 2:

Configure cutting data when creating a new tool.

rP
TC

nl
O
se
U

In

te

rn

al

Click New Tool


in the Tool
Setup dialog box.
Select the General tab.
Select END MILL from the
Type drop-down list.
Type FEM_25_0 in the Name
text box.
Edit the geometry parameters,
as shown.
Select the Cut Data tab.
Notice aluminum is selected
from the Stock Material
drop-down list.
Type 2330 in the Speed text
box.
Type 605 in the Feed text box.
Type 20 in the Axial Depth text
box.
Type 12 in the Radial Depth
text box.
Click the Apply button.

1. Create an end mill tool.

2. In the Tool Setup dialog box, click Save


information.

to save the tool

Fo

The saved tool file, fem_25_0.xml, contains feed and speed


information. You can use this information in the future if the tool is
retrieved into a different workcell, and aluminum is configured as
the stock material.

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 19

Retrieving Tool Data


You can configure a tool library where all tool data is stored.
This enables quick and easy retrieval of tools by all users.
Retrieving Tools

Store all tool parameter files.


Use sub-folders to divide tool
types.
Config.pro option:
pro_mf_tprm_dir.
Pro/ENGINEER searches for
tools from this folder.

Use Tool Setup dialog box.


Display tools with .xml and .tpm
file extensions.
By default.
Supported tool file extensions:
.xml Pro/ENGINEER
Wildfire 3.0 onwards.
.tpm .Pro/ENGINEER
release 12 to Pro/ENGINEER
Wildfire 2.0.
.tprm .pre-Pro/ENGINEER
release 12.
Tools appended in tool table.
Tool information stored with
manufacturing model.
Also store with workcell.

te

rn

Figure 1 Example Tool Folder


Structure

al

se

nl

Tool Parameter Libraries

In

Figure 2 Tool Listing

rP
TC

Tool Parameter Libraries

Fo

You can create a tool library where all tool parameter files are stored. You
can divide the library into folders for different types of tools, for example,
milling tools, drills, and center drills.
You can specify the location of a tool library using the configuration option
pro_mf_tprm_dir pathname.
For example, pro_mf_tprm_dir d:\ptc\tool_lib.
Pro/ENGINEER then automatically starts searching in the specified
location whenever you retrieve a tool.

Retrieving Tools
You can retrieve tools for use in NC sequences using the Tools Setup
dialog box.
By default, Pro/ENGINEER starts searching for tools in the pro_mf_tprm_dir
folder, or the current working directory if no configuration option is specified.
By default, you can retrieve tools with .xml or .tpm file extensions. You can
select the following tool file extensions:
.xml Tools created from Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 3.0 onwards.
Module 8 | Page 20

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

.tpm Tools created from Pro/ENGINEER release 12 to Pro/ENGINEER


Wildfire 2.0.
.tprm Tools created before Pro/ENGINEER release 12.
Note, as tools are retrieved and added to the tool table, the tool position
(tool number) automatically increments by one with respect to the last tool
in the table. You can manually edit the tool number to change its position
in the tool table if required.
By default, tool information is stored with the manufacturing model.
You can also store retrieved tools with a specific workcell.

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Retrieving Tool Data


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Tools_Retrieving
Task 1:

TOOL_LIB.ASM

Retrieve different tools into a workcell.

and Csys Display

rn

al

se

nl

2. Load a configuration option to specify the tool directory.


Click File > Options.
Select Configuration Editor.
Select Import/Export button.
Select Import Configuration file.
Select the CONFIG.PRO file, and click Open.
Click OK to close the Options dialog box.
Click No in the Creo Parametric Options Panel.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: Plane Display

to open the Tools Setup dialog box.

te

3. Click Cutting Tools

In

4. Retrieve a center drill tool.


Select CENTER-DRILLING
from the Type drop-down list.

Fo

rP
TC

in the
Click Retrieve Tool
Tools Setup dialog box.
Notice you are selecting from
the previously configured
pro_mf_tprm_dir folder.
Double-click the
CENTER_DRILLS folder.
Select the 08.XML tool, and
click Open.
Note the resulting tool
geometry updates, as shown.

Module 8 | Page 22

2011 PTC

5. Retrieve a drill tool.


Select DRILLING from the
Type drop-down list.

nl
O
se
U

al

6. Retrieve a bull nose mill tool.


Select MILLING from the Type
drop-down list.
Note, you must change the
tool type before retrieving the
required tool.

Click Retrieve Tool


in the
Tools Setup dialog box.
Double-click the DRILLS
folder.
Select the MMDRL_16.XML
tool and click Open.
Note the resulting tool
geometry updates, as shown.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

in the
Click Retrieve Tool
Tools Setup dialog box.
Double-click the MILL_TOOLS
folder.
Select the MMBUL10.XML
tool, and click Open.
Note the resulting tool
geometry updates, as shown.

2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 23

7. Retrieve a flat end mill tool.

nl

in the
Click Retrieve Tool
Tools Setup dialog box.
Double-click the MILL_TOOLS
folder.
Select the MMFLT18.XML
tool, and click Open.
Note, all stored tool
parameters are retrieved
with the tool, as shown.

se

By default, tool information is stored with the manufacturing model.


You can also save the workcell. This stores any retrieved tools
within the workcell configuration. This is useful if you want to
retrieve a workcell in different manufacturing models with tools
pre-configured.

rn

al

8. Save the manufacturing model.


Observe the tool table listing in the Tool Setup dialog box, as shown.
Click OK in the Tools Setup dialog box.

rP
TC

In

te

from the Quick Access toolbar.


Click Save
Click OK to save the manufacturing model.
Note, the tool information is saved with the manufacturing model.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 24

2011 PTC

9
y

Module

nl

Using Template Manufacturing Models

se

Module Overview

rn

al

You can create new manufacturing models from template manufacturing


models. The template manufacturing models can include pre-configured
manufacturing items to speed up the manufacturing process and enforce
manufacturing standards. You can use any manufacturing model, with any
number of features, as a template. The template can include items such
as operations, fixtures, and tooling.

Objectives

In

te

In this module, you learn about the items that you can include in template
manufacturing models and create a new manufacturing model using a
template manufacturing model.

Fo

rP
TC

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the items that you can include in template manufacturing models.
Create new manufacturing models using template manufacturing models.

2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 1

Using Template Manufacturing Models


You can use template manufacturing models with pre-configured
manufacturing items to speed up the creation of manufacturing
models.
Template Manufacturing Models Theory

te

nl

rn

al

se

Figure 2 Template Model

Figure 3 Template Features


in Model Tree

rP
TC

In

Default Templates
User-Defined Templates
Configuration Options
mfg_start_model_dir
template_mfgnc

Pre-configure manufacturing items:


Operation
Coordinate Systems
Retract Positions
Fixtures
Parameters
Workcell
Tooling
NC Sequences

Figure 1 Pre-Configure Tools

Fo

Template Manufacturing Models Theory

You can create template manufacturing models with pre-configured


manufacturing items to speed up the manufacturing process and enforce
manufacturing standards. When creating new manufacturing models, the
template manufacturing model is copied to the new manufacturing model.
You can use any manufacturing model, with any number of features, as a
template. The template can include items such as:
Operation You can include a configured operation.
Coordinate Systems You can specify machine zero positions and
configure coordinate systems for assembling reference models,
workpieces, and fixtures.
Retract Positions You can configure retract positions for use within
an operation.
Fixtures You can pre-load fixtures within the operation configuration.
Module 9 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Parameters You can pre-load site parameter files. These files enable
you to set default values for all NC sequence parameters.
Workcell You can specify the type of machine.
Tooling You can configure tooling within the workcell.
NC Sequences You can pre-load NC sequences that you can then edit.
Default templates are supplied with Pro/ENGINEER. These templates are
in imperial and metric units. You can also create an empty manufacturing
model.
Alternatively you can configure your own user-defined templates.
You can use the configuration option mfg_start_model_dir to locate
user-defined template models.
You can use the configuration option template_mfgnc to specify the
name of the default manufacturing template model.

2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Using Template Manufacturing Models


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Mfg_Templates
Task 1:

Review a template manufacturing model.

nl
O
se
U

Disable Axis Display


, and

al

Point Display

1. Open a template manufacturing


model.
From the Quick Access
toolbar, click Open
.
Double-click the
TEMPLATE_MODELS folder.
Select START_MODEL.ASM,
and click Open.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

.
Annotation Display
Notice that the retract plane
and machine coordinate
system have been configured.
Select FIXTURE.ASM in the
model tree.
Notice that the fixture
assembly highlights, as
shown.
Notice that the fixture
assembly, machine type,
and operation appear in the
model tree.

Module 9 | Page 4

2011 PTC

O
se
U

te

rn

al

3. Review the Workcell.


Select FADAL_VMC in the
model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Notice that a 3-axis mill
workcell has been configured,
as shown.
Select Accept .

nl

2. Review the operation configuration.


Select OP010[FADAL_VMC] in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit Definition.
Notice that all the required elements of the operation have been
configured, as shown.
Select Accept .

In

4. Review the configured tools.

Fo

rP
TC

Select Cutting Tools


.
Notice a number of tools have been configured, as shown.
Click OK to close the Tools Setup dialog box.

5. Close the template model and erase all objects from memory.
from the Quick Access toolbar.
Click Close Window
Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
Click OK to erase all objects from memory.

2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 5

nl
O
se
U

te

rn

al

in the Quick
Click New
Access toolbar.
Select the Manufacturing and
NC Assembly options.
Type TEST_NC in the Name
text box.
Clear the Use Default
Template check box, and click
OK.
Click Browse.
From the template_models
folder, select START_MODEL.
ASM, and click Open.
Click OK.
Notice that the template
manufacturing model features
have been copied into the new
model, as shown.

6. Create a new manufacturing


model using a template.

Fo

rP
TC

In

This completes the procedure.

Module 9 | Page 6

2011 PTC

10
O

nl

Using Manufacturing Parameters

Module

se

Module Overview

al

Manufacturing parameters enable you to control how an NC sequence is


generated. You can specify and edit parameter values as needed. You can
configure and store manufacturing parameters in global site files or in NC
specific parameter files. You can retrieve these files, enabling you to quickly
and easily set suitable parameter values when creating NC sequences.

Objectives

In

te

rn

In this module, you learn how manufacturing parameters control NC


sequences. You review the different methods used to configure and edit
parameter values. You edit parameter values in NC sequences and control
parameter values by editing and activating a site parameter file.

Fo

rP
TC

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe how manufacturing parameters control NC sequences.
Describe the different methods used to configure and edit parameter values.
Edit parameter values in NC sequences.
Edit and activate site parameter files.

2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 1

Understanding Manufacturing Parameter


Concepts
Manufacturing parameters enable you to control how an NC
sequence is generated. It is important to understand the different
ways in which you can configure manufacturing parameters.
Parameter Types

Control NC sequences
Examples:
CUT_FEED = 100
SPINDLE_SPEED = 500
STEP_DEPTH = 2.5
SCAN_TYPE = TYPE_SPIRAL

Six logical categories:


Feeds and Speeds
Cut Depth and Allowances
Cutting Motions
Entry/Exit Motions
Machine Settings
General
Required Parameters
Must be configured

se

nl

Manufacturing Parameters Theory

al

Optional Parameters

rn

Parameter List Variation

In

te

Based on type of NC sequence

rP
TC

Figure 1 Feeds and Speeds


Category

Manufacturing Parameters Theory

Fo

You create NC sequences by selecting or creating geometry to


machine. You then determine how to generate the toolpath by modifying
manufacturing parameters.
There are many different parameters that you can configure, including:
CUT_FEED Controls the feed rate of NC sequences during cutting
motions.
SPINDLE_SPEED Controls spindle speed in NC sequences.
STEP_DEPTH Controls the incremental depth of each pass when
cutting.
SCAN_TYPE Controls the method of scanning the machined area.

Parameter Types
Categories Parameters are grouped into six logical categories, enabling
you to quickly locate the relevant parameters to configure. The categories
are:
Feeds and Speeds Parameters such as CUT_FEED and
RETRACT_FEED.
Module 10 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Parameter List Variation

al

se

nl

Cut Depth and Allowances Cut parameters, such as STEP_DEPTH,


and stock allowance parameters.
Cutting Motions Parameters that specify the type of the cut, such as
SCAN_TYPE and CUT_TYPE.
Entry/Exit Motions Parameters that specify the entry and exit path for
the tool, such as plunge angle, lead-in, approach, and exit path.
Machine Settings Machine-related parameters, such as spindle speed
and coolant options.
General Machine and NC data file names.
Required Parameters These are parameters that you must set to create
an NC sequence.
Examples include STEP_DEPTH, CUT_FEED, and SPINDLE_SPEED.
These parameters are highlighted in a light yellow color in the Edit
Parameters dialog box until they have been configured. This enables
you to easily identify the parameters required to create an NC sequence.
Optional Parameters Some parameters are optional and you can set
them if required. They provide additional control of the toolpath.
One example is TOOL_OVERLAP, which you can use instead of
STEP_OVER.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

The parameters available for configuration can vary depending on the type
of NC sequence that you are creating.
Some parameters such as feed rate and spindle speed are present
in all NC sequence types.
Some parameters are specific to certain types of sequences. When
you create NC sequences, only the relevant parameters are available
for configuration.

2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 3

Configuring Parameter Values


You can configure parameter values using different methods. It
is important to understand how these methods work.
Specifying Parameter Values
Site Parameter Files
System Default Values
Parameter Files
Edit Parameter dialog box
Category
Parameters Basic/All
Copy from Tool
Show/Hide Details
Model Tree

se

nl

al

Figure 1 Specifying Parameter


Values

te

rn

Required Parameters
System Default Values
Optional Parameters
Numeric Assigned Parameters
Non-numeric Assigned
Parameters

rP
TC

In

System Default Parameter Values

Figure 2 Parameter Graphic


Illustration

Specifying Parameter Values

Fo

There are several ways to specify parameter values for NC Sequences,


including the following:

Site parameter files Enable you to set the default values for all NC
sequence parameters. When you create an NC sequence, these default
values are read in as the initial parameter values.
System default values If you do not use a site file, standard default values
for all parameters are automatically set.
Parameter files When creating NC sequences, you have the option to
read in parameter values from a file, or you can copy the parameter values
from a previous NC sequence in your model.
Edit Parameter dialog box When creating NC sequences, you can edit
parameter values directly using the Edit Parameter dialog box. A number
of options are available, including:
Category You can view any of the six parameter categories.
Alternatively you can view all categories.
Module 10 | Page 4

2011 PTC

Parameters basic/all You can view either the basic set of parameters
or all parameters for a specific category.
Copy from tool You can copy tool-cutting data parameters into an
NC sequence.
Show details/hide details You can optionally display a graphic
illustration for the selected parameter. The illustration appears for basic
parameters only. If the parameter has a predefined set of values, the
graphical illustration corresponding to the specified value appears.
Model tree You can configure parameters to display in the model tree.
You can then edit the values directly in the model tree.

System Default Parameter Values

nl

When creating NC sequences, Pro/ENGINEER assigns a number of default


values to parameters.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

Required parameters If a parameter is highlighted in a light yellow color


in the Edit Parameters dialog box, then it is a required parameter.
You must specify a value for this type of parameter to calculate a
toolpath.
Optional parameters If a parameter has a default value of -, it is an
optional parameter.
You can leave this type of parameter unchanged if required. For
example, APPROACH_FEED = -.
This type of parameter is not used unless you specify a value.
Numeric assigned parameters This type of parameter is assigned a
specific numeric value by default.
For example, CUT_ANGLE = 0.
You can change these parameters to other specific values if desired.
Non-numeric assigned parameters This type of parameter is assigned a
specific non-numeric value by default.
For example, COOLANT_OPTION = OFF.
You can change these parameters to other specific values if desired.
You can select the available values from a drop-down list.

2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Configuring Parameter Values


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed


PARAMS.ASM

Milling\Parameters_Configure
Task 1:

Create an NC sequence and edit parameter values.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

from the Milling group.

nl

Click Face

2. Select the Mill tab.

se
U

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

4. Edit a required parameter.


Select the Parameters tab.
Notice that the required
parameters are highlighted
in pale yellow in the Edit
Parameters dialog box.
Notice also that all
other parameters have
system-assigned default
values.
If necessary, select the
CUT_FEED parameter.
Edit the CUT_FEED parameter
value to 200, and press
ENTER.
Select the Edit Machining

3. Select the drop-down arrow next to the No tool box and select
50_0_END_MILL.

Fo

and notice
Parameters
the graphic illustration for the
selected parameter.

5. Edit the remaining required parameters for the NC sequence.


Parameter Name

Value

STEP_DEPTH

STEP_OVER

20

CLEAR_DIST

SPINDLE_SPEED

1000

Notice that the graphic illustration updates when possible.

Module 10 | Page 6

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

7. Specify a calculated parameter


value.
Select the STEP_OVER
parameter and notice that the
graphic illustration appears.
Click the Hide Details button
and notice that the graphic
illustration is hidden.
Click the Show Details button
and notice that the graphic
illustration appears again.
Edit the STEP_OVER
parameter value to
cutter_diam/2, and press
ENTER.
Select STEP_OVER again.

se

nl

6. Change the displayed


parameters.
Click the All button.
If necessary, scroll to the top
of the parameter list.
Notice the list of parameters
updates, as shown.
Select Cut Depth and
Allowances from the
Categories drop-down list.
Notice the list of parameters
updates, as shown.

Notice the parameter calculation appears, and the resulting value


appears in the parameter value text box, as shown.

2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 7

nl

8. Read in stored parameter values


from a file.
Click File > Open in the Edit
Parameters dialog box.
Select the FACE_MILL.MIL
parameter file, and click Open.
Notice that the parameter
values update, as shown.
Click OK in the Edit
Parameters dialog box.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

This completes the procedure.

Module 10 | Page 8

2011 PTC

Using Site Parameter Files


You can use site parameter files to control default values in NC
sequences. They can also control the range of parameter values
and the visibility of parameters.
Using Site Parameter Files

Parameter value control


Allowable range of values
Parameter visibility
Links to site parameter files
retained
Types
Mill, turn, holemaking, wire
EDM
General
Each type contains relevant
parameters

Activate
Link created
Deactivate
Link broken
Workcells
Assign different site parameter
files

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Site Parameter Files Theory

Figure 1 Site Parameter File Example

Site Parameter Files Theory

Fo

You can use site parameter files to control the default parameter values
used in NC sequences.
You can also use site parameter files to control the allowable range of
parameter values and control the visibility of parameters when creating
NC sequences.
For example, you can set a default value for a parameter, such as
CUTCOM = ON, and then turn off the visibility of this parameter to
prevent the value being edited.
If you use site parameter file values in NC sequences and subsequently
change a site parameter file, then you can update parameter values in any
referenced NC sequence.
You can configure several different types of site parameter files, including
mill, turn, holemaking, and Wire EDM.
Each type of site parameter file contains the parameters relevant to its
NC sequence types.
2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 9

You can also configure a general site parameter file that contains all
available manufacturing parameters.

Using Site Parameter Files

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Activate You must activate a site parameter file to use it to control


NC sequence parameter values. You can activate a site parameter file
manually (or select a different site file) when configuring NC sequence
parameters.
After activating a site parameter file, any subsequent edits to NC
sequence parameter values breaks the link to the site parameter file
for the edited parameter.
Changes made to that parameter in the site parameter file are no longer
passed on to the NC sequence.
Deactivate You can also deactivate site parameter files in NC sequences.
All of the linked parameter values are retained, but parameters no longer
obtain their values from the site parameter file.
Workcells You can assign one of each type of site parameter file to a
workcell, or you can assign a single general site parameter file.
Pro/ENGINEER then automatically uses the correct site parameter file
when creating new NC sequences. Parameter values are transferred
into the NC sequence where appropriate.

Module 10 | Page 10

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Using Site Parameter Files


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed


SITE_FILES.ASM

Milling\Parameters_Site
Task 1:

Create a mill site parameter file.

nl

and Csys Display

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: Plane Display

se

2. Click Site from the Machine Tool Setup group.


From the menu manager, click Create.
Type RGH_3_AXIS, as the site file name, and press ENTER.
Click Mill in the menu manager.

In

te

rn

al

3. Review the contents of the Site Tree dialog box, as shown.

rP
TC

When editing default values, you can access appropriate alternative


values from the drop-down list at the top of the dialog box. To edit
parameter default values, first select the default value. Then either
type in a new value or use the drop-down list at the top of the dialog
box to select a new value when possible.

Fo

4. In the CUT OPTION category, select the LACE_OPTION default


value and edit the following value in the DEFAULT VALUE column.
LINE_CONNECT specifies that for surface milling sequences,
cut motions are connected instead of retracted and repositioned
between each pass.
Parameter
LACE_OPTION

2011 PTC

Default Value
LINE_CONNECT

Module 10 | Page 11

5. In the CUT PARAM category, edit the following values in the


DEFAULT VALUE column.
TOOL_ROUGH_AXIAL_DEPTH and TOOL_ROUGH_RADIAL_
DEPTH use calculated values based on workpiece material and
tool diameter.
Parameter

Default Value
TOOL_ROUGH_AXIAL_DEPTH

STEP_OVER

TOOL_ROUGH_RADIAL_DEPTH

ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW

0.75

nl

STEP_DEPTH

se

6. In the FEED category, edit the following values in the DEFAULT


VALUE column.
TOOL_ROUGH_FEED_RATE uses a calculated value based on
workpiece material and tool diameter. Typing zero for a feed rate
outputs a RAPID command for that feed rate.
Parameter

Default Value

TOOL_ROUGH_FEED_RATE

al

CUT_FEED

rn

RETRACT_FEED

te

FREE_FEED

rP
TC

In

7. In the machine category, edit the following values in the DEFAULT


VALUE column.
TOOL_ROUGH_SPINDLE_RPM uses a calculated value based on
workpiece material and tool diameter.
Parameter

Default Value
TOOL_ROUGH_SPINDLE_RPM

COOLANT_OPTION

ON

Fo

SPINDLE_SPEED

8. In the ENTRY/EXIT category, edit the following value in the DEFAULT


VALUE column.
CLEAR_DIST specifies the distance needed to completely clear
the workpiece prior to retracting.
Parameter
CLEAR_DIST

Default Value
5

9. In the Site Tree window, click File > Exit to close the window.
10. Click Done/Return.

Module 10 | Page 12

2011 PTC

Task 2:

Activate the mill site parameter file within the workcell.

1. Right-click MACH01, in the model tree, and select Edit Definition.


Click the Parameters tab.
Click the Defaults button and select the RGH_3_AXIS_MIL check
box. Click Done Sel > Done.
in the SETUP: Milling Work Center
Click Accept Changes
dialog box.

nl

You must activate the site parameter file by selecting the check
box next to its name. You can only associate one of each type of
site parameter file to a workcell.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 13

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 10 | Page 14

2011 PTC

11
O

nl

Creating Face Milling Sequences

Module

se

Module Overview

In

te

rn

al

Face milling sequences enable you to face down the workpiece. This enables
you to configure the top surface of the job and a reference surface for other
NC sequences. When creating face milling sequences, it is important that
you use the correct manufacturing parameters to ensure that the toolpath is
efficiently generated. You can also create mill surfaces and use them as
alternate references when model surfaces are inappropriate, for instance,
when you need to machine multiple model surfaces as one surface. Once
you complete a face milling sequence, you can update the in-process
workpiece geometry. You achieve this by creating a material removal feature
that removes the machined volume from the workpiece

rP
TC

In this module, you learn about the face milling process and review the key
face milling manufacturing parameters. You create face milling sequences
and create mill surfaces relevant to face milling. You also create material
removal features specific to face milling.

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the face milling process.
Describe the key face milling manufacturing parameters.
Create face milling sequences.
Create mill surfaces relevant to face milling.
Create material removal features specific to face milling.

2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 1

Basic Face Milling


Face milling enables you to face down the workpiece. This
enables you to define the top surface of the job and a reference
surface for other NC sequences.

se

nl

Alternative machining reference.


Mill geometry.
Create before or during creation
of NC sequence.
Mill Surfaces
Fill
Extrude
Copy
Mill Windows
Closed outline
Depth considerations

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Face down the workpiece.


Select or create final machining
depth and area.
Model surfaces
Mill surfaces
Mill volume surfaces
Workpiece surfaces
Mill windows
All machining parallel to retract
plane.
All inner contours excluded.
Material removal after completing
NC sequence.

Using Mill Surfaces and Mill


Windows for Face Milling

al

Face Milling Theory

Figure 1 Basic Face Milling


Example

Figure 2 Editing Toolpath


Parameters

Fo

Face Milling Theory

A face milling sequence enables you to face down the workpiece with a
flat or radius end mill tool. You configure the final machining depth and
area by selecting or creating a planar surface parallel to the retract plane.
Alternatively, you can configure a mill window to define the depth and area to
be machined. The following features describe face milling NC sequences.
All machining movements are parallel to the retract plane.
All inner contours in the configured reference geometry (holes, slots) are
automatically excluded from machining.
If you have a workpiece in the manufacturing model, then you can remove
the machined volume from the workpiece by creating a material removal
feature. You can do this after you complete the NC sequence.

Module 11 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Using Mill Surfaces and Mill Windows for Face Milling


When creating face milling sequences, you can use mill geometry such as
mill surfaces and mill windows as alternative machining references when
model surfaces are not appropriate, for example, when you face mill multiple
model surfaces. You can create mill surfaces and mill windows before
creating an NC sequence or during the creation of an NC sequence.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Mill Surfaces
Mill surfaces are surface features and are often referred to as mill
geometry.
When referencing surfaces for face milling:
By default, the toolpath completely machines the selected surfaces.
The selected surfaces can be model surfaces, mill surfaces, surfaces
from mill volumes, or workpiece surfaces.
The most common mill surface types are:
Fill Use the fill tool to create a flat surface by sketching an outline
on a sketching plane.
Extrude Create an extruded surface by sketching an outline on
a sketching plane.
Copy Copy existing model surfaces to form a new mill surface.
Mill Windows
Mill windows are manufacturing geometry features that you can use
when creating face milling sequences. They consist of a closed outline
that defines the area to be machined. You can create them before or
during the creation of an NC sequence.
When referencing mill windows for face milling, the depth of the
mill window and the depth of the machined reference geometry are
considered in the following way:
If the highest Z-depth of the reference geometry is lower than the
mill window depth, then the final machined depth is defined by the
mill window plane.
If the highest Z-depth of the reference geometry is higher than the
mill window depth, then the final machined depth is defined by the
highest Z-depth of the reference geometry.

2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Basic Face Milling


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed


FACE_MILL.ASM

Milling\Face_Mill
Task 1:

Create a face milling sequence and edit parameter values.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


Select the Mill tab.

rn

al

3. Select the Parameters tab.


Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit STEP_DEPTH to 5.
Edit STEP_OVER to 30.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1000.

se

nl

2. Click Face
from the Milling group.
Select the drop-down arrow next to the box containing No tool
and select the 50_0_END_MILL.

rP
TC

In

te

4. Select the References tab.


Click in the Machining
References box.
Select the top surface of the
model, as shown.
5. Review the resulting toolpath.

Fo

Click Display Toolpath


.
Click Play .
Notice that the toolpath follows
the outline of the selected
model surface. You can
change this by referencing a
mill surface.
Click Close in the Play Path
dialog box when finished.

Module 11 | Page 4

2011 PTC

Task 2:

Use a mill surface as a machining reference for the NC sequence.

1. In the References tab, cursor


over Individual Surfaces,
right-click, and select Remove.

nl

from the Surfacing

3. Click Fill
group.

2. Click Mill Surface Tool


from
the Geometry drop-down list.

al

6. Click Sketch.
7. Click Project

5. Cursor over the model,


right-click, and select the
hidden model surface, as shown.

se

4. Right-click and select Define


Internal Sketch.

rn

8. Select the Loop option.

In

10. Click OK

te

9. Select the top surface of the


workpiece, as shown.
11. Click Complete Feature

rP
TC

12. Click Complete Tool


13. Click Resume

14. Click Apply Changes

Fo

15. Review the updated toolpath.


Select the toolpath just
created, in the model tree.
Right-click and select Play
Path. Click Play .
Notice that the toolpath now
follows the outline of the mill
surface, as shown.
16. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 5

17. If necessary, select the FILL 1 surface feature in the model tree.
Right-click and select Hide.
Note, you can hide and unhide mill surfaces as needed.
You could also configure a mill window as an alternative
machining geometry reference.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 6

2011 PTC

Lateral Control Face Milling Parameters


Lateral control parameters are a group of parameters that control
the lateral movement of the tool in face milling sequences.
Lateral movement is also affected by the trim_to_workpiece
parameter.

nl
O
se
al

Figure 1 Lateral Control


Parameters

Figure 2 Offset Parameters

In

te

rn

SCAN_TYPE
TYPE_1, TYPE_3,
TYPE_ONE_DIR, or
TYPE_SPIRAL
CUT_ANGLE
STEP_OVER
or NUMBER_PASSES
or TOOL_OVERLAP
STEP_OVER_ADJUST
NUMBER_PASSES = 1
One pass made at center
ONE_PASS_OFFSET
INITIAL_EDGE_OFFSET
FINAL_EDGE_OFFSET

Lateral Control Parameters

rP
TC

TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE Parameter

Fo

With a workpiece Can adjust to


boundary of workpiece.
No workpiece Always uses
boundary of machined surface.
Figure 3 TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
= YES

Lateral Control Parameters


The following is a summary of the key parameters that control the lateral
movement of the tool in face milling sequences.
SCAN_TYPE
TYPE_1 Moves the tool back and forth across the surface.
TYPE_3 If there are separate zones, then each zone is machined
separately. Otherwise the same as TYPE_1.
TYPE_ONE_DIR Machines in one direction and retracts between
passes.
TYPE_SPIRAL Creates a spiral toolpath.
2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 7

al

se

nl

CUT_ANGLE Is the angle between the cut direction and the X-axis of the
NC Sequence coordinate system.
STEP_OVER Three parameters control the step-over distance. The
final toolpath uses the parameter that produces the smallest calculated
step-over:
STEP_OVER Controls the step-over within a slice.
Or NUMBER_PASSES Explicitly sets the number of passes to take in
each slice.
Or TOOL_OVERLAP An alternative method to control the step-over
based on the tool overlap.
If NUMBER_PASSES is equal to 1, however, step-over is ignored and one
pass is created at the center of the machined surface for each slice.
STEP_OVER_ADJUST Adjusts the passes in the slice to start and finish
near the edges of the surface that you are machining. It only reduces the
step-over distance, and adds an extra pass if needed.
ONE_PASS_OFFSET Controls the distance away from the centerline
when NUMBER_PASSES is equal to 1, and a single pass is made.
INITIAL_EDGE_OFFSET Enables you to offset the first pass in relation
to the edge of the surface being milled.
FINAL_EDGE_OFFSET Enables you to offset the last pass in relation to
the edge of the surface being milled.

rn

TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE Parameter

In

te

Face milling sequences behave differently if a workpiece is in the


manufacturing model.

Fo

rP
TC

With a workpiece The starting height for the cuts is always one cut depth
below the top of the workpiece.
If TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE is set to NO, then Pro/ENGINEER machines
the selected surface without regard to the workpiece outline.
If TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE is set to YES, then the toolpath extends or
trims to the workpiece cross-section at the depth of the surface you
are machining.
Without a workpiece The sequence parameters exclusively determine
the starting height for the cuts and the toolpath completely machines the
selected surface.

Module 11 | Page 8

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Lateral Control Face Milling Parameters


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Face_Lateral
Task 1:

LATERAL.ASM

Edit lateral control parameter values in an existing NC sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

se

nl

2. Select the FACE MILLING NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

rn

al

Notice that the toolpath follows the outline of the selected


model surface. You can change this by editing the
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE parameter.

te

3. From the MILL Ribbon, click

from the

In

Step Parameters
Update group.

rP
TC

4. If necessary, click the All button,


and select All categories from
the Categories drop-down list.
5. Edit TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
to YES. Click OK in the Edit
Parameters dialog box.

Fo

6. Click Screen Play.


7. Click Play . Notice that the
toolpath now follows the outline
of the workpiece.

8. Edit the cut angle and step-over parameters.


Click Step Parameters

9. Edit the following parameters.


Edit CUT_ANGLE to 90.
Edit STEP_OVER to 40.
Click OK.

2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 9

10. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice that the
toolpath updates, as shown.

U
al

te

rn

13. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice that the
first and last passes update,
as shown.

nl

12. Edit the following parameters.


Edit INITIAL_EDGE_OFFSET to 15.
Edit FINAL_EDGE_OFFSET to 15.
Click OK.

se

Click Step Parameters

11. Edit the initial edge and final edge parameters.

In

14. Click Step Parameters

rP
TC

15. Edit NUMBER_PASSES to 1.


Click OK.
16. Click Screen Play.

Fo

17. Click Play . Notice that the


toolpath makes one pass at the
center of the model, as shown.
18. Edit the scan type and number passes parameters.
Click Step Parameters

19. Edit the following parameters.


Edit SCAN_TYPE to TYPE_ONE_DIR.
Edit NUMBER_PASSES to 0.
Click OK.

Module 11 | Page 10

2011 PTC

20. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice that the
TYPE_ONE_DIR value makes
the tool cut in one direction
only, retracting between
passes, as shown.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 11

Depth Control Face Milling Parameters


There are a number of parameters that control the depth of a cut
when creating face milling sequences.
Depth Control Parameters

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

STEP_DEPTH
NUMBER_CUTS
Smallest resulting depth of cut used.
If NUMBER_CUTS = 0 or 1 and STEP_DEPTH is greater than depth
to be machined.
One pass taken at full depth.
BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW
Stock remaining on machined surface.
Default is zero.

Figure 1 Depth Control Parameters

Fo

Depth Control Parameters


When you use a workpiece, the starting height for the cuts is determined by
the top of the workpiece. The following parameters control the depth of cut.

The STEP_DEPTH parameter specifies the depth between each slice, and
the NUMBER_CUTS parameter determines the number of slices.
The parameter that creates the smallest depth of cut is used.
If the NUMBER_CUTS equals 0 or 1 and the STEP_DEPTH is equal to or
greater than the depth to be machined, then one pass is taken at full depth.
The BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW parameter determines how much stock is
left on the machined surface. The default dash (-) value leaves zero stock.

Module 11 | Page 12

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Depth Control Face Milling Parameters


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Face_Depth
Task 1:

DEPTH.ASM

Edit depth control parameter values in an existing NC sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

se

nl

2. Select the FACE MILLING NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

rn

al

Notice that one pass is made at full depth. This is because


NUMBER_CUTS = 0, and STEP_DEPTH = 15, which is equal to
the depth from the top of the workpiece to the machined surface.

te

3. Edit the step depth parameter.


Click Step Parameters

In

4. If necessary, click the All button, and select All categories from the
Categories drop-down list.

rP
TC

5. Edit STEP_DEPTH to 10.


Click OK.

Fo

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice that the
tool now makes two passes,
one at a depth of 10 and one
at full depth, as shown.

7. Edit the number cuts parameter.


Click Step Parameters

8. Edit NUMBER_CUTS to 3.
Click OK.

2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 13

9. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice the
tool now makes three evenly
spaced depth passes, as
shown.

10. Edit the bottom stock allowance parameter.

nl

Click Step Parameters

se
U

te

rn

al

12. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
If necessary, click the CL Data
bar in the Play Path dialog
box. This makes the CL data
visible in the dialog box.
Click Play .

11. Edit BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW to 3.


Click OK.

In

Notice that the tool still makes three evenly spaced depth passes,
but now leaves a stock allowance of 3, as shown.

rP
TC

13. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
14. Click Done Seq.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 14

2011 PTC

Entry and Exit Face Milling Parameters


There are a number of parameters that control entry and exit
motions when creating face milling sequences.

nl

rn

al

se

START_OVERTRAVEL and END_OVERTRAVEL


Offsets for each pass.
APPROACH_DISTANCE and EXIT_DISTANCE
Offsets for the first and last passes.
ENTRY_EDGE and CLEARANCE_EDGE
Set to LEADING_EDGE, CENTER, or HEEL.

Entry and Exit Parameters

te

Figure 1 Entry and Exit Parameters Example

rP
TC

In

1. APPROACH_DISTANCE and START_OVERTRAVEL


2. END_OVERTRAVEL
3. START_OVERTRAVEL
4. EXIT_DISTANCE and END_OVERTRAVEL

Entry and Exit Parameters

Fo

The following parameters provide additional control over the entry and exit
motions for face milling sequences.
The START_OVERTRAVEL parameter adds an offset to the beginning of
each pass in a slice. The END_OVERTRAVEL adds an offset to the end of
each pass in a slice.
The APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter adds an extra approach distance
to the first pass of each slice. The EXIT_DISTANCE parameter adds an
extra distance to the last pass of each slice.
You can edit the ENTRY_EDGE parameter to LEADING_EDGE (the
default), CENTER, or HEEL. This parameter controls which point of the tool
is used for measuring the approach and over travel motions when the tool
approaches the component being machined during each pass in a slice.
You can edit the CLEARANCE_EDGE parameter to HEEL (the default),
CENTER, or LEADING_EDGE. This parameter controls which point of the
tool is used for measuring the exit and over travel motions when the tool
leaves the material during each pass in a slice.
2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Entry and Exit Face Milling Parameters


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed


ENTERY_EXIT.ASM

Milling\Face_Entry-Exit
Task 1:

Edit entry and exit parameter values in an existing NC sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl

2. Select the FACE MILLING NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.

te

rn

al

4. Review the current toolpath.


Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

, and select
Named Views
TOP from the drop-down list.

se

3. Orient the model using a named


view.
Select the VIEW tab, click

rP
TC

In

The toolpath has been configured using a (hidden) mill surface.


Notice no entry and exit parameters have been configured. You
can use the START_OVERTRAVEL and END_OVERTRAVEL
parameters to add offsets at the beginning and end of each pass.

5. Edit the over travel parameters.


Select the Mill tab.

Fo

Click Step Parameters

6. If necessary, click the All button, and select All categories from the
Categories drop-down list.
7. Edit END_OVERTRAVEL to 10.

8. Edit START_OVERTRAVEL to 10.


Click OK.

Module 11 | Page 16

2011 PTC

9. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice that the
tool now extends beyond the
workpiece on each pass, as
shown.

nl

Click Step Parameters

10. Edit the approach and exit distance parameters.

11. Edit APPROACH_DISTANCE to 25.

In

te

rn

al

13. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice the tool
now extends an extra distance
on the first and last pass, as
shown.

se

12. Edit EXIT_DISTANCE to 25.


Click OK.

rP
TC

14. Edit the entry edge and clearance edge parameters.


Click Step Parameters

Fo

Notice the ENTRY_EDGE parameter is configured as


LEADING_EDGE, and the CLEARANCE_EDGE parameter is
configured as HEEL.

15. Edit ENTRY_EDGE to CENTER.

16. Edit CLEARANCE_EDGE to CENTER.


Click OK.

2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 17

18. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

nl

19. Click Done Seq.

17. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice
Pro/ENGINEER now
calculates all tool extensions
relative to the center of the
tool, as shown.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 18

2011 PTC

12
y

Module

nl

Creating Volume Milling Sequences

se

Module Overview

In

te

rn

al

When machining, it is important that you be able to remove large amounts


of workpiece material. You typically use volume milling sequences for this
purpose. Examples include machining mold cavities, machining pockets and
slots, and facing down a workpiece. The volume milling process involves
specifying the volume of material to be removed. You achieve this by
creating either mill windows or mill volumes. You can modify volume milling
sequences using build cut and customized functionality. This enables you
to edit and remove the default cut motions and add new cut motions as
required. When a volume milling sequence is completed, you can update
the in-process workpiece geometry. You achieve this by creating a material
removal feature that removes the machined volume from the workpiece.

rP
TC

In this module, you learn about the volume milling process and review the
key volume milling manufacturing parameters. You create volume milling
sequences and create mill windows and mill volumes relevant to volume
milling.

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the volume milling process.
Describe the key volume milling manufacturing parameters.
Create volume milling sequences.
Create mill windows and mill volumes relevant to volume milling.
Modify volume milling sequences using build cut and customize
functionality.
Create material removal features specific to volume milling.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 1

Basic Volume Milling


Volume milling sequences enable you to machine material inside
a configured volume of material. This is useful for machining
mold cavities and machining pockets and slots.

nl

al

se

Figure 1 Volume Milling Toolpath


Example

Figure 2 Extruded Mill Volume

In

te

rn

Remove material inside volume.


For example Mold cavities, mold
electrodes, pockets, and slots.
Toolpath removes material
slice-by-slice.
Slices parallel to retract plane.
Roughing and profiling passes.
Use manufacturing geometry.
Mill volume or mill window.
Tool does not machine outside
specified volume.
Specify approach walls.
Also use top surfaces.
Modify default cut motions.
Build cut or customize.
Material removal after completing
NC sequence.

Volume Milling Theory

rP
TC

Mill Volume Configuration Tools

Add solid features Extrude a


sketched outline.
Trim Subtract reference model.

Fo

Figure 3 Trimmed Mill Volume

Volume Milling Theory


You typically use volume milling sequences to remove large amounts of
workpiece material. Examples include machining mold cavities and mold
electrodes and machining pockets and slots.
You can use the following features to describe volume milling NC sequences.
Volume milling sequences remove the material inside a specified volume
slice-by-slice.
All slices are parallel to the retract plane.
You can create both roughing and profiling passes within a volume milling
sequence.

Module 12 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Mill Volume Configuration Tools

se

nl

You use manufacturing geometry to configure the volume of material to


machine.
You can use a mill volume or mill window to represent the volume of
material to be removed.
By default, the tool does not machine outside the specified volume.
However, the tool can break through surfaces of a volume if they are
specifically selected as approach walls.
Top surfaces are surfaces of a mill volume that the tool can also penetrate
when creating the toolpath.
You only have to use this option if some of the top surfaces of the volume
are not parallel to the retract plane. If you use a mill window, this option
is not available. You can use the window start plane as the top surface.
You can modify the default cut motions by using the build cut or customize
functionality.
If you have a workpiece in the manufacturing model, you can remove
the machined volume from the workpiece by creating a material removal
feature. You can do this after you complete the NC sequence.

al

The following tools enable simple mill volume configuration:

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Add solid features You can sketch an outline and create an extruded mill
volume. If required, you can also create more complex shapes using tools
such as revolve, sweep, and blend.
Trim You can automatically subtract the reference model material from an
existing mill volume. You usually apply this to sketched volumes.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Basic Volume Milling


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Volume
Task 1:

MOLD_CAVITY.ASM

Create a mill volume using an extrude feature and trim


functionality.

nl

This manufacturing model does not contain a workpiece to enable


easier viewing of mill volume geometry. You can also create mill
volumes by referencing workpiece geometry.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Click Extrude
Shapes group.

al

rn

4. Right-click and select Define


Internal Sketch.

from the

se

from
2. Click Mill Volume Tool
the Manufacturing Geometry
group.

te

5. Select the top surface of the


reference model, as shown.

In

6. Click Sketch.

rP
TC

from the
7. Click References
Setup group. Select the top
and right edges of the reference
model as references, as shown.
8. Click Close in the References
dialog box.
.

Fo

9. Click Project

10. Select the Loop option.


11. Select the top surface of the
reference model, as shown.

12. Click Accept to select the outer


loop of edges, as shown.
13. Click OK
in the Sketch
dashboard.

Module 12 | Page 4

2011 PTC

14. Click Change Depth Direction


in the Extrude dashboard.
15. Edit the depth to 41.
16. Click Complete Feature
the Extrude dashboard.

in

Note that you have created an extruded mill volume, and you can
subtract the reference model from the mill volume geometry using
the trim functionality.

nl

17. Trim the reference model


geometry from the mill volume.

Click Trim
from the Volume
Features group.

Create a volume milling sequence using the trimmed mill volume.

In

Task 2:

te

rn

al

19. Click OK
from the Controls
group .
Notice that the reference
model is subtracted from the
mold volume geometry, as
shown.

se

18. Select the reference model, as


shown.

rP
TC

1. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.

Fo

from the Roughing drop-down menu in


2. Select Volume Rough
the Milling group .
Notice that in the SEQ SETUP menu, the Tool, Parameters, and
Window check boxes are automatically selected.
Select the Volume check box.
You must configure these items to generate a toolpath.
Click Done.
3. Ensure that the 20_E_MILL tool is selected, and then right-click and
select Select tool and return.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 5

4. Edit the required parameters for


the NC sequence.
Edit CUT_FEED to 80.
Edit STEP_DEPTH to 10.
Edit STEP_OVER to 15.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 600.
Click OK.

nl

5. Select the previously configured


mill volume, as shown.

al

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


From the menu manager, click
Play Path > Screen Play.
Click Play .

se

You can also create mill volumes during the creation of NC


sequences.

In

te

rn

Click Repaint
from the
Graphics toolbar.
Notice that the tool machines
material within the mill volume.

7. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

rP
TC

8. Click Done Seq.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 12 | Page 6

2011 PTC

Volume Milling with Mill Windows


You can use mill windows to specify the volume of material to be
machined when creating volume milling sequences.

se

nl

Figure 1 Selected Outline

Figure 2 Sketched Outline

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

Closed outline projected onto


reference model.
Configuring mill windows:
Select a closed outline.
Sketch a closed outline.
Use reference model silhouette
outline.
Reference model geometry within
window is machined.
Options:
Placement
Depth
Offset Window Uniformly
Window Contour Options:
Inside
On
Outside
Inside loops

Mill Windows Theory

Figure 3 Silhouette Outline

Mill Windows Theory

Fo

Mill windows are manufacturing geometry features that you use to create
volume milling sequences. They consist of a closed outline projected from
the window start plane onto the reference model. You can then machine
the resulting outline in a volume milling sequence. You can create them
before or during the creation of an NC sequence.
You create a mill window by:
Sketching or selecting a closed outline in an appropriate plane.
Projecting the silhouette outline of the reference part on the mill window
start plane.
All reference model geometry visible within the window is machined.
You can configure a number of options.
Placement Defaults to the retract plane. Enables you to configure the
starting plane.
Depth Defaults to reference model geometry. Alternatively you can
specify a blind depth of up to a selected plane parallel to the window
start plane.
2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 7

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Offset Window Uniformly Enlarge or reduce the window contour by


a constant distance.
Window Contour Options
Inside The tool is always within the outline of the mill window.
On The tool axis reaches the window outline.
Outside The tool goes completely past the window outline.
Inside Loops If a reference part used for creating the silhouette
contains through cuts or holes, you can specify if you want to keep or
remove these loops by using the Keep Inside Loops check box.

Module 12 | Page 8

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Volume Milling with Mill Windows


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Volume_Mill_Window
Task 1:

MILL_WINDOW.ASM

Create a volume milling sequence and edit parameter values.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

from the Roughing drop-down menu

nl

Select Volume Rough


in the Milling group.
Click Done.

3.

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.

se

4. Ensure that the 20_E_MILL tool is selected, and then right-click and
select Select tool and return.

te

rn

al

5. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Edit CUT_FEED to 80.
Edit STEP_DEPTH to 10.
Edit STEP_OVER to 15.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 600. Click OK.

rP
TC

In

6. Configure a mill window using


the Silhouette Outline option.
Click Mill Window Tool

Fo

from the Manufacturing


Geometry group.
Notice that the operation
retract plane is automatically
selected as the window plane.
By default, a silhouette window
is configured, as shown.
Click Complete Feature .

7. Review the resulting toolpath.


From the menu manager, click
Play Path > Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the tool machines all reference model geometry inside
the mill window outline.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 9

Task 2:

Use a selected contour mill window as an alternative machining


reference for the NC sequence.

1. From the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Seq Setup.


2. Select the Window check box, and click Done.
3. Configure a mill window using
the Chain Window option.

O
se

In

te

rn

al

Click Chain Window


in
the Mill Window dashboard.
Right-click and select Chain to
active the selection of edges.
Select one of the inner chain of
edges at the top of the pocket,
as shown.
Press SHIFT and select
another edge in the loop, as
shown.
Notice how the tangent chain
of edges highlights on the
model, as shown.
Click Complete Feature .

nl

to

Click Mill Window Tool


start the Mill Window tool.

Fo

rP
TC

4. Click Play Path > Screen Play.


Click Play .
Notice the updated toolpath.

Notice that the tool now machines inside the new mill window
outline.

5. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.


6. Click Done Seq.
This completes the procedure.

Module 12 | Page 10

2011 PTC

Scanning Volume Milling Parameters


Scanning parameters are a group of parameters that control how
the tool machines each slice in volume milling sequences.
High speed machining options
CONSTANT_LOAD
SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE
SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_DIRECTION
FOLLOW_HARDWALLS

Scanning Parameters

nl
O
se

rn

al

Figure 1 ROUGH_OPTION =
ROUGH_&_PROFILE

Figure 2 SCAN_TYPE = TYPE_ONE_DIR

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

SCAN_TYPE
TYPE_1
TYPE_2
TYPE_3
TYPE_SPIRAL
TYPE_ONE_DIR
POCKETING
FACES_ONLY
CUT_ANGLE

ROUGH_OPTION
ROUGH_ONLY
ROUGH_&_PROF
PROF_&_ROUGH
PROF_ONLY
ROUGH_&_
CLEAN_UP
POCKETING
FACES_ONLY

Figure 3 CUT_ANGLE = 45 degrees

Scanning Parameters

The following is a summary of the key parameters that control how the tool
scans each slice in volume milling sequences.
ROUGH_OPTION Controls whether a profiling and/or roughing pass is
created during volume milling.
ROUGH_ONLY No profiling.
ROUGH_&_PROF Rough then profile.
PROF_&_ROUGH Profile then rough.
PROF_ONLY Only profiling.
ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP Cleans up the walls of the volume without
creating a profiling pass.
2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 11

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

POCKETING Profiles the walls of the volume and finish mills all the
planar surfaces inside the volume that are parallel to the retract plane
(island tops and bottom of the volume).
FACES_ONLY Finish mills only the planar surfaces inside the volume
that are parallel to the retract plane (island tops and bottom of the
volume).
CUT_ANGLE The angle between the cut direction and the X-axis of the
NC Sequence coordinate system.
SCAN_TYPE For volume milling. Refers to the way a milling tool scans
the horizontal cross-section of a milling volume and avoids islands.
TYPE_1 Continuously machines the volume. Retracts upon
encountering islands.
TYPE_2 Continuously machines the volume without retracting, while
moving around the islands.
TYPE_3 Removes material from continuous zones defined by the
island geometry, machining them in turn and moving around the islands.
TYPE_SPIRAL Generates a spiral cutter path.
TYPE_ONE_DIR The tool only cuts in one direction.
POCKETING Profiles the walls of the volume and finish mills all the
planar surfaces, inside the volume, that are parallel to the retract plane
(island tops and bottom of the volume).
FACES_ONLY Finish mills only the planar surfaces, inside the
volume, that are parallel to the retract plane (island tops and bottom
of the volume).
The following SCAN_TYPE parameter values relate specifically to high
speed machining methods.
CONSTANT_LOAD Performs high speed roughing (with
ROUGH_OPTION set to ROUGH_ONLY) or profiling (with
ROUGH_OPTION set to PROF_ONLY).
SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE Generates a spiral cutter path with
reverse arc connections between cuts. This is a high speed machining
option, which minimizes retracts.
SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_DIRECTION Generates a spiral cutter path
with S-shape connections between cuts. This is a high speed machining
option, which minimizes retracts.
FOLLOW_HARDWALLS The shape of each cut follows the shape of
the walls of the volume, maintaining fixed offset between the respective
points of two successive cuts. If the cuts are closed, there are S-shape
connections between the cuts.

Module 12 | Page 12

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Scanning Volume Milling Parameters


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Volume_Scanning
Task 1:

SCANNING_PARAMS.ASM

Edit parameters relating to scanning in an existing NC sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

se

nl

2. Select the VOLUME MILLING


NC sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

rn

al

For clarity, the STEP_DEPTH is equal to the depth of the


pocket; this ensures only one pass is made at full depth. The
ROUGH_OPTION parameter is currently equal to ROUGH_ONLY.
You can edit this parameter to add profiling passes for each
machined slice.

te

3. Edit the rough option parameter.


.

In

Click Step Parameters

rP
TC

4. Edit ROUGH_OPTION to ROUGH_&_PROF.


Click OK.

Fo

5. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice that the
tool makes a profiling pass
after the roughing pass, as
shown.
If you edit the ROUGH_OPTION to PROF_&_ROUGH, a profiling
pass is made before the roughing pass.

6. Edit the scan type parameter.


Click Step Parameters

7. Edit SCAN_TYPE to TYPE_SPIRAL.


Click OK.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 13

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the tool now follows a spiral toolpath.

nl

Click Step Parameters

9. Edit the scan type parameter again.

al

se

11. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

10. Edit SCAN_TYPE to TYPE_ONE_DIR.


Click OK.

te

rn

Notice that the tool now only cuts in one direction. However, a
profile pass is still made because the ROUGH_OPTION is still
equal to ROUGH_&_PROF.

In

12. Edit the cut angle parameter.


Click Step Parameters

rP
TC

13. Edit CUT_ANGLE to 45.


Click OK.

Fo

14. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the tool now scans at 45 degrees relative to the X-axis
of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
15. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
16. Click Done Seq.
This completes the procedure.

Module 12 | Page 14

2011 PTC

Depth and Lateral Control Volume Milling


Parameters
There are many parameters that control the depth of cut and
lateral movement when you create volume milling sequences.
Depth Control Parameters

Step-over distance:
STEP_OVER
NUMBER_PASSES
TOOL_OVERLAP
BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HEIGHT
STEP_OVER_ADJUST

STEP_DEPTH
WALL_SCALLOP_HGT
MIN_STEP_DEPTH

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Lateral Control Parameters

Figure 1 Lateral Control


Parameters

Figure 2 Depth Control


Parameters

Fo

Lateral Control Parameters

Four parameters control the step-over distance. The final toolpath uses
whichever parameter produces the smallest calculated step-over.
STEP_OVER This is the default parameter for controlling the step-over
within a slice.
Or NUMBER_PASSES This explicitly sets the number of passes to
take in each slice.
Or TOOL_OVERLAP This is an alternative method to control the
step-over based on the tool overlap.
BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HEIGHT This must be less than or equal to
cutter radius. You can also use it to calculate step-over.
STEP_OVER_ADJUST This parameter adjusts the passes in the slice
to start and finish near the edges of the volume that you are machining. It
only reduces the step-over distance, and adds an extra pass if needed.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 15

Depth Parameters

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

You can use the STEP_DEPTH parameter to specify the depth between
each slice.
WALL_SCALLOP_HGT Also controls the step depth for volume milling.
WALL_SCALLOP_HGT Must be less than or equal to the cutter
radius. The default value is 0.
If WALL_SCALLOP_HGT is zero, a scallop height is calculated using
STEP_DEPTH.
If you specify WALL_SCALLOP_HGT > 0, a step depth is calculated
using WALL_SCALLOP_HGT. This calculated value is compared to the
STEP_DEPTH, and the smallest calculated step-depth is used.
MIN_STEP_DEPTH Specifies the minimum allowable distance between
slices.

Module 12 | Page 16

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Depth and Lateral Control Volume Milling


Parameters
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Volume_Depth_Lateral
Task 1:

DEPTH_LATERAL.ASM

Edit parameters relating to lateral movement in an existing NC


sequence.

nl
O

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

te

rn

al

se

2. Select the VOLUME MILLING


NC sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Named Views
from
the In Graphics toolbar and
select TOP.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play. Click Play .

For clarity, no workpiece has been configured.

rP
TC

In

The tool step-over is controlled by the STEP_OVER parameter


which is equal to 18. The STEPOVER_ADJUST parameter is equal
to NO. You can edit this parameter to ensure that the first and last
passes start and finish near the edges of the volume that you are
machining.

3. Click Step Parameters

4. If necessary, click the All button.

Fo

5. Edit STEPOVER_ADJUST to YES.


Click OK.

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that STEP_OVER is reduced, so the first and last passes


start and finish near the edges of the machined volume, as shown.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 17

7. Edit the step-over parameter.


Click Step Parameters

8. Edit STEP_OVER to 15.


Click OK.

nl

9. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the step-over is
reduced and the tool makes
seven passes, as shown.

Click Step Parameters

se

10. Edit the number of passes parameter.


.

11. Edit NUMBER_PASSES to 8.


Click OK.

rn

al

The resulting step-over is compared to the current STEP_OVER


value and the smallest resulting STEP_OVER is used.

rP
TC

In

te

12. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the number of
passes is now equal to eight.
13. Edit the step depth parameter.
Click Step Parameters

Fo

14. Edit ROUGH_OPTION to PROF_ONLY.


15. Edit STEP_DEPTH to 10.
Click OK.

16. Press CTRL + D to return to the standard orientation.


17. Review the resulting toolpath.
Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the tool machines
five profile slices with a step
depth of 10, as shown.

Module 12 | Page 18

2011 PTC

18. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
19. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 19

Stock Allowance Volume Milling Parameters


There are a number of parameters that control the stock
allowance when you create volume milling sequences.
Stock Allowance Parameters

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW Stock on walls for rough passes.


PROF_STOCK_ALLOW Stock on walls for profile passes.
Used in material removal.
BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW Stock on bottom faces for rough and
profile passes.
Defaults to PROF_STOCK_ALLOW if set to -.

Figure 1 Stock Allowance Parameters

Stock Allowance Parameters

Fo

The following parameters control stock allowance when volume milling.


ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW This controls stock on walls for roughing
passes.
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW This controls the stock on walls for profile
passes. You can also use it to calculate remaining stock when creating
material removal features.
BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW This controls the stock on bottom faces for
rough and profile passes. Defaults to PROF_STOCK_ALLOW if set to -.

Module 12 | Page 20

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Stock Allowance Volume Milling


Parameters
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Volume_Stock_Allowance
Task 1:

STOCK_ALLOW.ASM

Edit parameters relating to stock allowance in an existing NC


sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

O
se
U

rn

al

from
Click Named Views
the In Graphics toolbar and
select the named view TOP.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play. Click Play .

nl

2. Select the VOLUME MILLING


NC sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.

te

There is no stock remaining on the side walls after the roughing


or profiling passes.

In

3. Click Step Parameters

4. If necessary, click the All button.

rP
TC

5. Edit PROF_STOCK_ALLOW to 1.

6. Edit ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW to 5.
Click OK.

Fo

7. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the toolpath leaves 5 mm of stock after the roughing


passes, and 1 mm of stock after the profiling passes. The
BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW is set to , so it automatically uses the
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW value of 1. This leaves stock remaining on
the bottom face of the pocket.
You can use the PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameter to calculate
the stock remaining after creating a material removal feature.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 21

8. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.


9. Click Done Seq.
10. Press CTRL + D to return to the standard orientation.

nl
O
se

al

1. Select Material Removal Cut


from the Manufacturing
Geometry Group drop-down
menu.
Click Volume Milling from the
menu manager.
Click Automatic > Done.
Click the Auto Add button
to select the workpiece to
intersect.
Click OK to complete the
feature.

Create a material removal feature to cut away the machined


volume from the workpiece for the volume milling sequence.

Task 2:

te

rn

The automatic cut is created in the workpiece. The cut geometry


is based on the PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameter value in the
volume milling sequence.

In

2. Review the remaining stock


material.

Fo

rP
TC

Click Named Views


from
the In Graphics toolbar and
select the named view TOP.
From the In Graphics toolbar,
select No Hidden
from
the Model Display Types
drop-down menu to set the
display to no hidden line.
Zoom in to the upper-right
corner of the workpiece, as
shown.
Notice the stock remaining on
the vertical walls in the pocket.

3. Press CTRL + D to return to the standard orientation.


4. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading
Display Types drop-down menu.

from the Model

This completes the procedure.

Module 12 | Page 22

2011 PTC

Gathering Mill Volumes


The gathering technique enables you to create complex mill
volume shapes by referencing model geometry including
surfaces and edges.

se

nl

Figure 1 Surf and Bound: Seed


Surface

Figure 2 Surf and Bound:


Bounding Surface

Figure 3 Fill Inner Loops

Figure 4 Cap Plane and Resulting


Volume

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

Select Surfaces Form extruded


quilt.
Surf and Bound
Surfaces
Features
Mill Surfaces
Exclude Exclude specified items.
Surfaces
Loops
Fill Fill inner loops.
All
Loops
Close Cap mill volume.
Specify plane or surface.
Use retract plane.

Gathering Mill Volumes Options

Gathering Mill Volumes Options


The gathering technique enables you to create a mill volume by referencing
model geometry including surfaces and edges.

The gathering process involves several steps and the selection of various
options:
Select Surfaces You select the surfaces to machine. There are several
methods available. With each method, the selected surfaces are sewn
together to form a single quilt which is by default extruded up to the retract
plane to form a volume. Alternatively, you can extrude the quilt to a
user-defined plane if required. There are four options for selecting surfaces.
Surf and Bound You select one of the surfaces for machining (the
seed surface) and then select bounding surfaces. The seed surface and
all neighboring surfaces up to the boundary surfaces are sewn together
2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 23

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

into a single quilt. You can also configure boundary loops to add outer
loops of edges to the boundary.
Surfaces You select continuous surfaces to machine.
Features You select features to be machined. All the surfaces of
selected features are included.
Mill Surfaces You select pre-configured mill surfaces.
Exclude This option is available only if you gather using an option other
than Surf and Bound (for example, Surfaces). There are two exclude
options.
Surfaces Exclude some of the selected surfaces by selecting each of
them individually. This is especially convenient when gathering using
the Features or Mill Surf options.
Loops Exclude outer loops. Use this option to delete unwanted
portions of surfaces selected for gathering.
Fill When you fill an inner loop of edges on a surface selected for
gathering, it is equivalent to "patching" the base quilt of the mill volume.
The volume is built as if there was a smooth surface with no perforations.
Two fill options are available.
All Fill all loops on a selected surface. Select a surface. All inner loops
on this surface are filled, whether they belong to bounding surfaces or
not.
Loops Select loops to be filled. For each loop to be filled, you must
select only one edge. If you gather using Surf and Bound, the edges
must lie on the bounding surfaces. Select additional bounding surfaces
if necessary.
Close This enables you to specify the mill volume capping plane.
The mill volume is generated by extruding the boundaries of the selected
surface quilt vertically up to the specified plane or surface.
If you create a mill volume during the creation of a volume milling
sequence, then by default Creo Parametric closes the mill volume
automatically. This is done by extruding the boundaries of the surface
quilt vertically up to the retract plane. Note in this case, you can still
specify an alternative capping plane if required.

Module 12 | Page 24

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Gathering Mill Volumes


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Volume_Gather
Task 1:

GATHER.ASM

Create a mill volume using the gather technique.

This manufacturing model does not contain a workpiece to enable


easier viewing of mill volume geometry. You can also create mill
volumes by referencing workpiece geometry.

se

2. Click Mill Volume Tool

nl

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

rn

al

4. Notice that the Select and Close


check boxes are selected by
default. You must select these
items to configure a mill volume.

3. Click Gather Volume Tool


from the Volume Features group.

te

5. Select the Fill check box, and


click Done.

In

6. Click Surf & Bnd > Done.

rP
TC

7. Select a seed surface.


Select the surface within the
pocket, as shown.

Fo

8. Select a boundary surface.


Select the top surface on the
model, as shown.
Click OK.
Click Done Refs >
Done/Return.

9. Fill surfaces to exclude inner


contours.
Press CTRL, and select the
two flat surfaces within the
pocket, as shown.
Click OK.
Click Done Refs >
Done/Return.
Any inner contours in the selected filled surfaces are now patched.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 25

nl

11. Click OK

10. Cap the mill volume.


Select the All Loops check
box, and click Done.
In the model tree, select the
RETRACT datum plane.
Click Done/Return from the
CLOSE LOOP menu.
Click Show Volume. Notice
that the volume appears in
wireframe.
Click Done from the VOL
GATHER menu.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

12. Edit the capping plane of the


gathered mill volume.
Select the GATHER mill
volume in the model tree.
Right-click, and select Edit
Definition.
Select the Close check box,
and click Done.
Click Redefine.
Select a bounding edge of the
pocket, as shown.
Select the Cap Plane check
box, and click Done.
Select the top surface of the
model as the new capping
plane, as shown.
Click Done/Return from the
CLOSE LOOP menu.
Click Done from the VOL
GATHER menu.

se

You have created a mill volume by gathering surfaces to form a quilt


and extruding the resulting quilt up to the retract plane, as shown.
You can redefine this mill volume at any time.

Notice that the mill volume geometry has updated, as shown.

This completes the procedure.

Module 12 | Page 26

2011 PTC

Modifying Volume Milling Toolpaths


You can use the build cut or customize functionality to modify
the default cut motions generated for volume milling sequences.
Modifying Volume Milling Toolpaths

Modify default cut motions.


Two tools:
Build Cut
By Slice
By Region
Customize
Automatic
Upto Depth
From-To Depth
Slice/Slice

se

nl

Figure 1 Build Cut By Slice

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

Figure 2 Build Cut By Region

Figure 3 Customizing Cut Motions

Modifying Volume Milling Toolpaths

Fo

By default, volume milling cut motions (toolpaths) are generated based on the
selected reference geometry and the manufacturing parameters. However,
you can use two tools to modify these default cut motions.

Build Cut This functionality enables you to modify the default cut motions
by adding or removing slices or editing machining regions. You can also
specify approach and exit paths. You must select one of two machining
methods.
By Slice Machine across the whole milling volume at a particular
Z-depth.
By Region Completely machine a pocket before going to the next
pocket (region-by-region milling).
Customize You can also modify default cut motions using the customize
functionality. You can configure four cut motion types.
Automatic Use all the slices automatically generated by the system
(the default option).
Upto Depth Use slices up to a certain depth only.
2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 27

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

From-To Depth Use slices in a certain range of depths.


Slice/Slice Generate automatic cut motions by specifying the depth of
each slice.
Various options in the Customize dialog box enable you to specify
approach and exit motions, edit individual cut motion parameters, and
remove unwanted cut motions.

Module 12 | Page 28

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Modifying Volume Milling Toolpaths


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Volume_Toolpaths
Task 1:

BLOCK.ASM

Use the build cut functionality to change from by slice to by region.


This manufacturing model does not contain a workpiece to enable
easier viewing of the cut motions.

se

nl

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select the VOLUME MILLING
NC sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

te

3. Click Seq Setup.

rn

al

The tool machines across each pocket using a slice-by-slice


motion. You can edit this toolpath using Build Cut functionality.

5. Click Done.

In

4. Select the Build Cut check box.


6. Select the By Region check box.

rP
TC

7. Click Confirm to switch to by


region.

8. Click Order Regions.

Fo

9. Select the edge of the top region,


as shown.

10. Select the edge of the right


region, as shown.
11. Select the edge of the center
region, as shown.

12. Click Play Cut.


Observe the displayed cut
motion, as shown.
13. Click Done/Return.
You can preview the cut motion from the BUILD CUT menu. This
enables you to verify the toolpath before completing the build cut.

2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 29

14. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Play Path.
Select the Compute CL check
box.
You must select this check
box to recalculate the updated
toolpath.
Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

nl

Notice that the tool machines each region in the selected order.

15. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

se

16. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

This completes the procedure.

Module 12 | Page 30

2011 PTC

13
y

Module

nl

Creating Profile Milling Sequences

se

Module Overview

In

te

rn

al

Profile milling sequences enable you to rough and finish mill both vertical
and slanted surfaces. This is useful for machining the sidewalls of pockets
and for machining outside profiles of components. When creating profile
milling sequences, you can create mill surfaces and use them as alternate
references when model surfaces are inappropriate, for instance, when the
model surface being machined has a variable depth. Another important
skill with profile milling is the ability to refine the entry and exit motions of
the toolpath to enable proper application of cutter compensation and to
eliminate witness lines from the machined surfaces. When a profile milling
sequence is completed, you can update the in-process workpiece geometry.
You can achieve this by creating a material removal feature that removes the
machined volume from the workpiece.

rP
TC

In this module, you learn about the profile milling process and review the
key profile milling manufacturing parameters. You create profile milling
sequences and create mill surfaces relevant to profile milling.

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the profile milling process.
Describe the key profile milling manufacturing parameters.
Create profile milling sequences.
Create mill surfaces relevant to profile milling.
Create lead in and lead out motions.

2011 PTC

Module 13 | Page 1

Basic Profile Milling


Profile milling sequences enable you to machine vertical and
slanted surfaces. This is useful for machining the sidewalls of
pockets and for machining outside profiles of components.

nl

Alternative machining reference.


Mill geometry.
Create before or during creation
of NC sequence.
Common mill surface types:
Fill
Extrude
Copy

se

Machine vertical or slanted


surfaces.
Select or create final machining
surfaces.
Continuous toolpath required.
Final cut depth determined by
machined surface depth.
Approach and exit moves.
Material removal after completing
NC sequence.

Using Mill Surfaces for Profile


Milling

Profile Milling Theory

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Modify default cut motions.


Use approach/exit or tool motions.

al

Customizing the Toolpath

Figure 2 Profile Milling Example

Fo

Figure 1 Customize Example

Profile Milling Theory

You can use profile milling to rough or finish mill vertical or slanted surfaces.
You configure the final finishing surface by selecting reference model
surfaces or creating mill surfaces. The following features describe profile
milling NC sequences.
Surfaces selected for machining must enable a continuous toolpath.
The depth of the surfaces selected for machining determines the final cut
depth.
You can configure tool approach and exit motions.
If you have a workpiece in the manufacturing model, you can remove
the machined volume from the workpiece by creating a material removal
feature. You can do this after you complete the NC sequence.
Module 13 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Customizing the Toolpath

nl

By default, toolpaths are generated based on the selected reference


geometry and the manufacturing parameters.
It is possible to modify these default cut motions by adding alternative
approach and exit moves.
You can use two tools to do this:
Approach/Exit This option enables you to add or remove slices or
cutting passes, and specify approach and exit paths.
Tool Motions This option enables you to modify default cut motions.
This includes removing default cut motions and adding your own cut
motions including approach and exit tool motions.
Both tools provide essentially the same functionality, but use different
interfaces.

Using Mill Surfaces for Profile Milling

se

When creating profile milling sequences, you can use mill geometry such
as mill surfaces as alternative machining references when model surfaces
are not appropriate. As an example, you can do this when you profile mill a
model surface that has a variable depth.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

Mill surfaces are surface features and are often referred to as mill geometry.
(The other mill geometry features are mill volumes and mill windows.)
You can create mill surfaces before creating an NC sequence, or during the
creation of an NC sequence.
The most common mill surface types are:
Fill Use the fill tool to create a flat surface by sketching an outline
on a sketching plane.
Extrude Create an extruded surface by sketching an outline on a
sketching plane.
Copy Copy existing model surfaces to form a new mill surface.

2011 PTC

Module 13 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Basic Profile Milling


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Profile
Task 1:

BASIC_PROFILE.ASM

Create a profile milling sequence and edit parameter values.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Click Tool Manager

in the Milling dashboard.

nl

from the Milling group.

3. Click Profile Milling

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.

se

5. Ensure that the 20_0_E_MILL tool is selected, and then right-click


and select Select tool and return.

te

rn

al

6. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Select the Parameters tab in the dashboard.
Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit STEP_DEPTH to 10.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1000.

Fo

rP
TC

In

7. Configure the surface for


machining.
Select the Reference tab
in the dashboard, and click
Details below the Machining
References collector.
In the Surface Sets dialog box,
click Add.
Notice the default rule
selection is Loop surfaces.
Cursor over the model,
right-click, and select the
top surface of the reference
model, as shown.
Select any outer edge of the
reference model for the loop
edge, as shown.
Notice that the selected loop
of surfaces highlight.
Click OK.

Module 13 | Page 4

2011 PTC

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Display Toolpath
the dashboard.
Click Play .

in

Notice that the toolpath cannot make a complete pass at the final
depth, because the model surface is not continuous at this depth.

1. Click Resume Feature

Use a mill surface as a machining reference for the NC sequence.


.

nl

Task 2:

2. Select the Reference tab.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

3. In the Machining References


collector, cursor over Loop
Surfaces, right-click, and select
Remove.

2011 PTC

Module 13 | Page 5

4. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.


5. Click Mill Surface Tool
6. Click Extrude

7. Right-click and select Define


Internal Sketch.
8. Select the top surface of the
workpiece, as shown.

9. Click Sketch.

nl

10. Click References


. Select
the top and right edges of the
workpiece as references, as
shown.

12. Click Project

se

11. Click Close in the References


dialog box.

al

13. Select the Loop option.

rn

14. Cursor over the model,


right-click, and select the
hidden model surface, as shown.

16. Click OK

In

te

15. Query select to select the outer


loop of edges, and then click
Accept .

rP
TC

17. Click Change Depth Direction


in the dashboard.
18. Edit the depth to 25.

19. Click Complete Feature

Fo

20. Click OK

21. Select the Milling dashboard.


in
22. Click Display Toolpath
the dashboard.
Click Play .
Notice the updated toolpath.
23. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
24. Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 6

2011 PTC

Depth and Lateral Control Profile Milling


Parameters
When you create profile milling sequences, you can use a
number of parameters to control the depth of cut and lateral
movement.
Lateral Control Parameters

STEP_DEPTH
AXIS_SHIFT

PROF_INCREMENT
NUM_PROF_PASSES
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW

al

se

nl

Depth Control Parameters

Figure 2 Lateral Control


Parameters

In

te

rn

Figure 1 Depth Control Parameters

rP
TC

Depth Control Parameters

When you create profile milling sequences, you can use two parameters
to control the depth of cut.

Fo

STEP_DEPTH The incremental depth of each cut for each profile pass.
AXIS_SHIFT Moves the CL data up or down along the tool axis. If set to
a positive value, all CL data is shifted down along the tool axis. If set to a
negative value, all CL data is shifted up along the tool axis. The default is 0.

Lateral Control Parameters


When you create profile milling sequences, you can use three parameters to
control the lateral movement of the tool.
PROF_INCREMENT The horizontal distance between passes.
NUM_PROF_PASSES The number of profile passes at each depth.
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW The remaining stock material left on profile
milled surfaces.

2011 PTC

Module 13 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Depth and Lateral Control Profile Milling


Parameters
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Profile_Depth_Lateral
Task 1:

DEPTH.ASM

Edit depth control parameter values in a profile milling sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

se

nl

2. Select the DEPTH_PROFILE


NC sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play. Click Play .

rn

al

Notice that one pass is made at full depth. This is because


STEP_DEPTH = 25. This is equal to the depth from the top of the
workpiece to the lower edge of the machined model surfaces.
3. Edit the step depth. Click Step Parameters

te

4. If necessary, click the All button, and select All categories from the
Categories drop-down list.

In

5. Edit STEP_DEPTH to 15. Click OK.

Fo

rP
TC

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play . Notice that the
tool now makes two passes,
one at a depth of 15 and one
at full depth, as shown.
7. Edit the axis shift. Click Step Parameters

8. Edit AXIS_SHIFT to 5. Click OK.

Module 13 | Page 8

2011 PTC

nl

Edit lateral control parameters in a profile milling sequence.

Task 2:

9. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
If necessary, click the CL data
bar in the Play Path dialog
box. This makes the CL data
visible.
Click Play . Notice that the
tool still makes two passes,
but the depth of each pass in
the Z-axis is shifted by 5, as
shown.

Click Step Parameters

se

1. Edit the profile increment and number of profile passes parameters.


.

te

rn

al

2. Edit the following parameters.


Edit AXIS_SHIFT to 0 (to return to the default value).
Edit PROF_INCREMENT to 5.
Edit NUM_PROF_PASSES to 2.
Click OK.

rP
TC

In

3. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the toolpath now
makes two passes at each
depth, as shown.

Fo

Click Named Views


from
the In Graphics toolbar.
Select the named view TOP.
.
Click Rewind
Click Play
again.
Notice the tool increments
horizontally by 5 between
each profile pass, as shown.

4. Edit the profile stock allowance.


Click Step Parameters

5. Edit PROF_STOCK_ALLOW to 2. Click OK.

2011 PTC

Module 13 | Page 9

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the tool now leaves
a stock allowance of 2, as
shown.
7. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

8. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 10

2011 PTC

Lead In and Lead Out Motions


When you create profile milling sequences, you can use a
number of parameters to control lead in and lead out motions.
Lead In and Lead Out Motion Parameters
CUTCOM
CUT_ENTRY_EXT
CUT_EXIT_EXT
LEAD_RADIUS
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP

nl

NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
OVERTRAVEL_DISTANCE
APPROACH/EXIT
APPROACH_DISTANCE
EXIT_DISTANCE

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

Figure 1 Lead In and Lead Out Tool Motion

Lead In and Lead Out Motion Parameters

Fo

When you create profile milling sequences, you can use a number of
parameters to control lead in and lead out motions.

CUTCOM Turns cutter compensation on or off in the CL data file. When


configuring a workcell, you can specify whether the cutter compensation
is toward the tool center (default) or tool edge.
CUT_ENTRY_EXT/CUT_EXIT_EXT Set to LEAD_IN/LEAD_OUT, tool
enters and exits the workpiece along a tangent arc.
LEAD_RADIUS Radius value of the tangent circle move for lead in or
lead out.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP Linear distance of the tangent section of a lead
in or lead out motion.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP Linear distance of the normal section of a lead
in or lead out motion.
OVERTRAVEL_DISTANCE For profile milling. The distance the tool
travels past the start of a profile pass.
2011 PTC

Module 13 | Page 11

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

APPROACH/EXIT For profile milling, this is an optional element. It


enables creation of approach and exit moves. You can use these as an
alternative to lead in and lead out motions.
APPROACH_DISTANCE You can use this parameter when creating
cut motions or using the approach/exit option. The distance of an
approach move for a tangent or normal approach.
EXIT_DISTANCE You can use this parameter when creating cut
motions or using build cut. The distance of an exit move for a tangent
or normal exit.

Module 13 | Page 12

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Lead In and Lead Out Motions


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Profile_Lead_In_Out
Task 1:

LEAD_IN_OUT.ASM

Edit the lead in and lead out parameters in a profile milling


sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl

2. Select the LEAD_PROFILE NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.

se

Click Display Toolpath


in
the Milling dashboard. Click
Play .

al

Notice, one pass is made at full depth. There are no lead in or lead
out motions configured for the toolpath.

rn

3. Create a lead in and lead out motion.


.

te

Select Resume Feature

Select the Parameters tab. Click Edit Machining Parameters

In

4. If necessary, click the All button, and select All categories from the
Categories drop-down list.

rP
TC

5. Select LEAD_IN from the Edit CUT_ENTRY_EXT drop-down menu.

6. Select LEAD_OUT from the Edit CUT_EXIT_EXT drop-down menu.


7. Edit LEAD_RADIUS to 10. Click OK.

Fo

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


.
Click Display Toolpath
Click Play . Notice that lead
in and lead out motions are
now created, as shown.

9. Adjust the entry and exit moves.


Select Resume Feature

Select the Parameters tab. Click Edit Machining Parameters


.

10. Edit TANGENT_LEAD_STEP to 10.


11. Edit NORMAL_LEAD_STEP to 10.
12. Edit OVERTRAVEL_DISTANCE to 5. Click OK.
2011 PTC

Module 13 | Page 13

13. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Display Toolpath
in
the Milling dashboard.
Click Play . Notice the
over travel distance removes
any witness lines from the
machined surfaces.
14. Add cutter compensation to the lead in and lead out moves.

nl

Select Resume Feature

Select the Parameters tab. Click Edit Machining Parameters

15. Select ON from the Edit CUTCOM drop-down menu. Click OK.

In

te

rn

al

Click Display Toolpath


in
the Milling dashboard.
If necessary, click the CL data
bar in the Play Path dialog
box. This makes the CL data
visible.
Click Play . Notice that
during the lead in and lead out
moves, cutter compensation is
applied, as shown.

se

16. Review the resulting toolpath.

Create an approach and exit position.

rP
TC

Task 2:

1. Select Resume Feature


.

Fo

2. Enable

in the Milling dashboard.

Module 13 | Page 14

2011 PTC

3. Select the Options tab in the


Milling dashboard.
4. Select the Approach Axis text
box in the Options tab.
This enables the selection of
an Approach Axis.
From the model, select axis
AA_1 as shown.

se

nl

5. Select the Exit Axis text box in


the Options tab .
This enables the selection of
an Exit Axis.
From the model, select axis
AA_1, again.

6. Select the Parameters tab. Click


Edit Machining Parameters
.

rn

al

7. Edit NORMAL_LEAD_STEP to
0.
8. Click OK.

te

9. Review the resulting toolpath.

In

Click Display Toolpath


Click Play .

rP
TC

You can now control the approach and exit location on the profile
based on the axis position. Notice that the NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
is zero as this move is controlled by the position of the axis.

Fo

10. Click Close.


Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 13 | Page 15

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 13 | Page 16

2011 PTC

14
y

Module

se

nl

Creating Straight Cut Surface Milling


Sequences
Module Overview

te

rn

al

Straight cut surface milling sequences enable you to mill contoured and
horizontal surfaces with a series of straight cuts. You can use straight cut
surface milling to create semi-finish sequences for contoured surfaces of
components, or mold cavities. When you create surface milling sequences,
you can use mill surfaces as alternate references when model surfaces are
inappropriate, for example, when the model being machined is made up of
many surfaces, or if you need to extend the toolpath beyond the model.

rP
TC

In

In this module, you learn about the surface milling process and review the key
straight cut surface milling manufacturing parameters. You create straight cut
surface milling sequences and create mill surfaces relevant to surface milling.

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the surface milling process.
Describe the key straight cut surface milling manufacturing parameters.
Create straight cut surface milling sequences.
Create mill surfaces relevant to surface milling.

2011 PTC

Module 14 | Page 1

Understanding Surface Milling


You use surface milling to mill horizontal or contoured surfaces.
There are four types of surface milling sequences that you can
configure. It is important to understand the benefits of each type
of surface milling sequence.
Surface Milling Theory

nl

Machine horizontal or contoured


surfaces.
Continuous toolpath required.
Cut types:
Straight Cut
From Surface Isolines
Cut Line
Projected Cuts

se

Figure 1 Straight Cut

Surface Milling Options

te

rn

al

Figure 2 From Surface Isolines

Figure 3 Cut Line

Fo

rP
TC

In

Cut Type
Geometry Selection
Model
Mill Volume
Mill Surface
Mill Window

Figure 4 Projected Cuts

Surface Milling Theory

You use surface milling to mill horizontal or contoured surfaces. The selected
surfaces must enable a continuous toolpath.
There are four cut types that enable you to configure the cut motion and
generate the toolpath.
Straight Cut You mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts.
From Surface Isoline You mill the selected surfaces by following the
surface UV lines.
Cut Line You mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the
first, last, and optionally intermediate cuts. The generated toolpath
gradually changes the shape of the cuts according to surface topology.
Module 14 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Projected Cuts You mill the selected surfaces by projecting their


contours on the retract plane, creating a "flat" toolpath in this plane
(using the appropriate scan type), and then projecting this toolpath back
on the original surface(s).

Surface Milling Options


You need to configure a number of options when creating surface milling
sequences, including the following options.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Cut type You can change the cut type during the configuration of the NC
sequence. You can configure the four previously mentioned cut types.
Geometry selection A number of options are available.
Model You can select reference model surfaces for machining.
Mill volume You can use mill volume surfaces.
Mill surface You can use mill surfaces.
Mill window If you select a mill window, then all surfaces within the
mill window are selected.

2011 PTC

Module 14 | Page 3

Straight Cut Surface Milling


Straight cut surface milling enables you to mill the selected
surfaces with a series of straight cuts.

nl

rn

al

se

Machine selected surfaces using straight cuts.


Machining direction:
Use CUT_ANGLE parameter.
Straddle open edges.
Avoid inner walls.
Patch slots.

Straight Cut Surface Milling Theory

In

te

Figure 1 Straight Cut Example

Figure 2 CUT_ANGLE =
45 Degrees

rP
TC

Straight Cut Surface Milling Theory


You can use the following features to describe straight cut surface milling.

Fo

You mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts.


The machining direction is controlled by the cut angle parameter.
You completely machine the selected surface(s).
If a surface is not bound by walls on the outside, the tool "straddles" or
overruns the surface boundary by half the tool diameter.
Any inner protrusions, as well as the outer walls extending up from the
surface, are automatically avoided. The stock allowance, if any, applies to
the side walls as well.
If you select a surface from the model, any slots or holes on the surface are
"patched." By default, the toolpaths are generated as if they were not there.

Module 14 | Page 4

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Straight Cut Surface Milling


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Surface_Straight-Cut
Task 1:

STRAIGHT_CUT.ASM

Create a straight cut surface milling sequence and edit parameter


values.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.

se

3. Click Surface Milling


from the Milling group.
Notice that in the SEQ SETUP menu, the Tool, Parameters,
Surfaces, and Define Cut check boxes are automatically selected.
You must configure these items to generate a toolpath.
Click Done.

al

4. Ensure that the 40_B_E_MILL tool is selected, and then right-click


and select Select tool and return.

rP
TC

In

te

rn

5. Edit the parameters for the NC sequence.


Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit STEP_OVER to 10.
Select TYPE_1 from the SCAN_TYPE drop-down menu.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1000. Click OK.

Fo

6. Configure the surface for


machining.
Click Model > Done.
Press CTRL and select the
four curved surfaces on the
top of the reference model, as
shown.
Click OK. Click Done/Return.

2011 PTC

Module 14 | Page 5

7. Configure the cut definition.


Notice that the Cut Type option
is configured as Straight Cut
by default.

nl
O
se
U

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


From the menu manager, click
Play Path > Screen Play.
Click Play .

Click Flip Direction


.
Notice that the cut direction
arrow updates on the model,
as shown.
Notice also that the Cut Angle
value automatically changes
to 180.
Click OK.

rn

al

Notice that the toolpath passes over the pocket and avoids the
circular extrusion.

rP
TC

In

te

9. Reconfigure the cut definition.


From the NC SEQUENCE
menu, click Seq Setup.
Select the Define Cut check
box, and click Done.
Select the By Edge option.
Select the right edge of the
reference model, as shown.
Click OK.

Fo

10. Review the resulting toolpath.


From the menu manager, click
Play Path > Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the cut angle is now aligned with the selected edge.
11. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box.
12. Click Done Seq.

This completes the procedure.

Module 14 | Page 6

2011 PTC

Straight Cut Surface Milling Parameters


There are a number of parameters that control straight cut
surface milling sequences. It is important to understand how
these parameters work.

nl

se

Figure 1 SCAN_TYPE = TYPE_1

rn

al

Figure 2 SCAN_TYPE = TYPE_3

Figure 3 Lateral Control and Stock


Allowance

rP
TC

In

te

SCAN_TYPE
TYPE_1
TYPE_3
CUT_ANGLE
LACE_OPTION
LINE_CONNECT
CURVE_CONNECT
ARC_CONNECT
LOOP_CONNECT
Lateral control
STEP_OVER
TOOL_OVERLAP
SCALLOP_HEIGHT
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW

Straight Cut Parameters

Straight Cut Parameters


The following parameters control the creation of a straight cut surface milling
sequence.

Fo

SCAN_TYPE Refers to the way a milling tool scans the surfaces and
avoids islands. For straight cut surface milling, the options are:
TYPE_1 Continuously machines the surface, retracts upon
encountering islands.
TYPE_3 The tool removes material from continuous zones defined by
the island geometry, machining them in turn and moving around the
islands.

CUT_ANGLE The angle between the cut direction and the X-axis of the
NC Sequence coordinate system.
LACE_OPTION If configured, causes the tool to cut back and forth, and
specifies the shape of connection between the endpoints of neighboring
cuts. There are various connection types.
LINE_CONNECT The neighboring endpoints are connected by
straight line segments.

2011 PTC

Module 14 | Page 7

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

CURVE_CONNECT The tool follows the geometry of obstacles that


would otherwise interrupt the cutting pass. Use CURVE_CONNECT
only if LINE_CONNECT causes gouging.
ARC_CONNECT Creates smooth, arc-like connections between the
neighboring cutting passes. The cutting passes are shortened, as
necessary, to accommodate the connecting motions so that the tool
stays within surface boundaries.
LOOP_CONNECT The neighboring endpoints are connected by
vertical loops, with the tool leaving and entering material tangent to the
surface being machined.
Lateral control options include:
STEP_OVER The default parameter for controlling the step-over
within a pass.
TOOL_OVERLAP You can use this option as an alternative method to
control the step-over based on the tool overlap.
SCALLOP_HEIGHT This must be less than or equal to cutter radius.
You can also use it to calculate step-over.
You should use whichever parameter produces the smallest
calculated step-over.
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW Controls the stock remaining on machined
surfaces. You can also use it to calculate remaining stock when you
create material removal features. For surface milling, this can be negative,
allowing machining into the reference model. However, this is useful when
you machine electrodes.

Module 14 | Page 8

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Straight Cut Surface Milling Parameters


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Surface_Straight-Parameters
Task 1:

PARAMS.ASM

Edit straight cut parameter values in a surface milling sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

se

nl

2. Select the STRAIGHT_CUT NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

rn

al

Notice that the tool machines around the circular extrusion and
pocket. This is because the SCAN_TYPE = TYPE_3. Notice also
that the cut angle is equal to 45 degrees.
.

te

3. Edit the scan type and the cut angle. Click Step Parameters
4. Edit CUT_ANGLE to 0.

rP
TC

In

5. Select TYPE_1 from the SCAN_TYPE drop-down menu.


6. Click OK.

Fo

7. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the tool now retracts over the extrusion, and machines
over the pocket, and the cut angle has changed, as shown.

8. Edit the step-over and tool overlap. Click Step Parameters

9. If necessary, click the All button, and select All categories from the
Categories drop-down list.
10. Edit TOOL_OVERLAP to 30.
11. Edit STEP_OVER to 0.
12. Click OK.

2011 PTC

Module 14 | Page 9

13. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Click Step Parameters

nl

14. Edit the scallop height to control the step-over distance.

Notice that the resulting step-over has been reduced and is now
calculated using the TOOL_OVERLAP parameter, as shown.

15. Edit SCALLOP_HGT to 0.4.

se

16. Click OK.

rn

al

17. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

te

Notice that the resulting step-over has been reduced and is now
calculated using the SCALLOP_HGT parameter, as shown.

In

18. Edit the profile stock allowance to control the remaining stock.

rP
TC

Click Step Parameters

19. Edit PROF_STOCK_ALLOW to 2.


20. Click OK.

Fo

21. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Named Views
from
the In Graphics toolbar.
Select the named view
FRONT.
Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Zoom in to the model, as
shown.
and then
Click Rewind
click Play
again.
Notice the stock remaining on the machined surface, as shown.

Module 14 | Page 10

2011 PTC

22. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box.


23. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 14 | Page 11

Creating Surface Milling Reference Geometry


You can use reference geometry such as mill surfaces as
alternative machining references in surface milling.
Surface Milling Reference Geometry
Alternative surface machining
references.

te

rn

al

se

nl

Figure 1 Copying Surface

Figure 2 Extending a Surface

Fo

rP
TC

In

Mill Surfaces
Copy
Extrude
Fill
Mill surface modification
Extend
To Plane
Along Surface
Same
Tangent
Approximate
Trim
Merge
Mill Volumes
Mill Windows

Figure 3 Merged Surfaces

Surface Milling Reference Geometry


You can use manufacturing geometry as an alternative surface machining
reference when creating surface milling sequences. You can use surfaces
from mill surfaces, mill volumes, and mill windows.
Mill Surfaces You can use mill surfaces to reference multiple model
surfaces and group them into a single surface. This enables more efficient
surface selection when creating surface milling sequences. The most
common options for mill surfaces are:
Module 14 | Page 12

2011 PTC

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Copy Copy selected reference model surfaces. You can select


individual surfaces or use surf and bound techniques to select multiple
surfaces.
Extrude You can sketch a 2-D outline and extrude the outline to create
a surface.
Fill You can sketch a flat 2-D outline to form the boundaries of a
surface.
Mill surface modification You can use the following tools to extend, trim,
and merge surfaces together.
Extend You can extend the edges of a surface by a specified distance
or up to a plane. The following options enable you to configure the
surface extension:
To Plane Extends the boundary edge chain up to a specified plane
in a direction normal to this plane.
Along Surface Extends the surface boundary edge chain along the
original surface. When Along Surface is used to create an extend
feature, you can use one of the following options to determine how
the extension is done.
Same The default, creates an extension of the same type as the
original surface (for example, plane, cylinder, cone, or spline surface).
The original surface is extended past its selected boundary edge
chain.
Tangent Creates the extension as a ruled surface that is tangent to
the original surface.
Approximate Creates the extension as a boundary blend between
the boundary edges of the original surface and the edges of the
extension. This method is useful when extending the surface up to a
vertex that does not lie along a straight edge.

Fo

Trim You can trim a mill surface using another surface, datum plane,
or curve.
Merge When you create additional surface patches, the added patches
are not automatically included in the mill surface definition. You must
connect the patches with the base quilt (the one that includes the first
added surface) by merging.
Mill Volumes You can select surfaces from mill volumes and use them
as surface machining references.
Mill Windows If you use mill windows, then all surfaces within a mill
window are selected.

2011 PTC

Module 14 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Creating Surface Milling Reference


Geometry
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Surface_References
Task 1:

MILL_SURF.ASM

Create a mill surface by copying reference model surfaces.

nl

This manufacturing model does not contain a workpiece to enable


easier viewing of mill surface geometry.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

3. Select the surfaces to copy.


Select the reference model, as
shown.
Select the curved surface
on the reference model, as
shown.
Press CTRL and select the
other three curved surfaces
on the reference model, as
shown.
In the ribbon, select the
Manufacturing tab. Click

se

2. Click Mill Surface Tool


from
the Manufacturing Geometry
group.

Copy

Fo

Click Paste
.
Notice that the four curved
surfaces are copied.

Module 14 | Page 14

2011 PTC

nl
O
se

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

5. Extend the mill surface.


If necessary, select the COPY
1 mill surface in the model
tree.
Right-click, and select
Redefine Mill Surface.
Select one edge of the mill
surface, as shown.
Press SHIFT and select the
mill surface, until the tangent
chain of edges are selected,
as shown.
Notice that the tangent chain of
edges highlight on the model,
as shown.

Click OK
.
Notice the completed mill
surface, as shown.

4. Exclude inner pockets and fill


holes.
Click Options in the Surface
Copy dashboard.
Select the Exclude surfaces
and Fill holes option.
Press CTRL, and select the
edges of the left and right
pockets, and the edge of the
hole, as shown.
Notice the pockets and hole
are filled, as shown.
in
Click Complete Feature
the Surface Copy dashboard.

.
Click Extend
Edit the extend value to 5.
Click Complete Feature
in the Surface Extension
dashboard.
Click OK
.
Notice the extended surface
on the model, as shown.
You can use this mill surface as a machining reference. You can
also hide the mill surface to clarify the model display.

2011 PTC

Module 14 | Page 15

6. Hide the mill surface.


Select the COPY 1 mill surface
in the model tree.
Right-click, and select Hide.
Notice that the mill surface
is no longer displayed in the
model, as shown.

You can redefine this mill surface at any time, as required.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

Module 14 | Page 16

2011 PTC

15
y

Module

se

nl

Creating From Surface Isolines Surface


Milling Sequences
Module Overview

rn

al

From surface isolines surface milling sequences enable you to create


toolpaths based on the natural UV contours of the machined surfaces. You
can use from surface isolines surface milling to create finish or semi-finish
sequences for contoured surfaces of components, or mold cavities.

rP
TC

Objectives

In

te

In this module, you learn about the from surface isolines surface
milling process and review the key from surface isolines surface milling
manufacturing parameters. You then create and edit from surface isolines
surface milling sequences.

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the from surface isolines surface milling process.
Describe the key from surface isolines surface milling manufacturing
parameters.
Create and edit from surface isolines surface milling sequences.

2011 PTC

Module 15 | Page 1

From Surface Isolines Surface Milling


From surface isolines surface milling creates toolpaths based
on the natural UV contours of the machined surfaces.
From Surface Isolines Surface
Milling Theory

Machine using natural UV surface


contours.
Straddle open edges.
Avoid inner walls.
No patching of slots.

nl

Figure 1 Surface Contour


Directions

se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 Resulting Toolpath

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

SCAN_TYPE
TYPE_1/2/3
Lateral control:
STEP_OVER
TOOL_OVERLAP
SCALLOP_HGT
NUMBER_PASSES
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW

From Surface Isolines Parameters

Figure 3 Straight Cut Example

From Surface Isolines Surface Milling Theory


The following features describe from surface isolines surface milling.
You create a toolpath using the natural UV surface contours of the surfaces
being machined.
You completely machine the selected surface(s).
If a surface is not bound by walls on the outside, the tool "straddles" or
overruns the surface boundary by half the tool diameter.

Module 15 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Any inner protrusions, as well as the outer walls extending up from the
surface, are avoided automatically. The stock allowance, if any, applies to
the side walls as well.
If you select a surface from the model, any slots or holes on the surface
are not "patched." For 3-axis milling, the tool moves over internal slots
or holes at a constant Z-level, plunging or retracting at the lower edge
as necessary. For four- and five-axis milling, the tool retracts at all inner
edges. If this is not required, then you can use a mill surface or select a
surface from a mill volume.

From Surface Isolines Parameters

nl

The following parameters control how a from surface isolines surface milling
sequence is generated.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

SCAN_TYPE Refers to the way a milling tool scans the surfaces and
avoids islands. For from surface isolines surface milling, the options are:
TYPE_1 Continuously machines the surface and retracts upon
encountering islands.
TYPE_2 Continuously machines the surface without retracting while
moving around the islands.
TYPE_3 The tool removes material from continuous zones defined by
the island geometry, machining them in turn and moving around the
islands.
Lateral control options include:
STEP_OVER The default parameter for controlling the step-over
within a pass.
TOOL_OVERLAP You can use this option as an alternative method to
control the step-over based on the tool overlap.
SCALLOP_HGT This must be less than or equal to cutter radius and
can also be used to calculate step-over.
NUMBER_PASSES You can use this option to explicitly set the
number of passes in each slice.
You should use whichever parameter produces the smallest
calculated step-over.
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW Controls the stock remaining on machined
surfaces. You can also use it to calculate remaining stock when you
create material removal features. For surface milling, this can be negative,
enabling machining into the reference model. However, this is useful when
you machine electrodes.

2011 PTC

Module 15 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - From Surface Isolines Surface Milling


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Surface_Isolines
Task 1:

SURFACE_ISOLINES.ASM

Create a from surface isolines surface milling sequence and edit


parameter values.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.

se

3. Click Surface Milling


from the Milling group.
Notice that in the SEQ SETUP menu, the Tool, Parameters,
Surfaces, and Define Cut check boxes are automatically selected.
You must configure these items to generate a toolpath.
Click Done.

al

4. Ensure that the 40_B_E_MILL tool is selected, and then right-click


and select Select tool and return.

rP
TC

In

te

rn

5. Edit the parameters for the NC sequence.


Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit STEP_OVER to 10.
Select TYPE_1 from the SCAN_TYPE drop-down menu.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1000.
Click OK.

Fo

The parameter listing assumes you are creating a Straight Cut


surface milling sequence. However, the listing changes if you
configure the cut type to From Surface Isolines, and then reedit
the parameters.

6. Configure the surface for


machining.
Click Model > Done.
Press CTRL and select the
four curved surfaces on the
top of the reference model, as
shown.
Click OK.
Click Done/Return.

Module 15 | Page 4

2011 PTC

nl

7. Configure the cut definition.


Select the From Surface
Isolines option.
Select the first surface in the
Surface list. Note that the
cut direction highlights on the
model, as shown.
Select the remaining surfaces
in the Surface list. Note that
the cut direction highlights for
each selected surface on the
model, as shown. Click OK.

se

8. From the menu manager, click


Play Path > Screen Play.
Click Play .

In

te

rn

al

9. Reconfigure the cut definition.


From the NC SEQUENCE
menu, click Seq Setup.
Select the Define Cut check
box, and click Done.
Select the first surface in the
Surface list.

rP
TC

.
Click Toggle Direction
Select the remaining surfaces
in the Surface list. For
each surface, click Toggle

Fo

.
Direction
Notice that the cut direction
arrows update on the model,
as shown. Click OK.
You can also specify the order in which surfaces are machined
in the Cut Definition dialog box.

10. From the menu manager, click


Play Path > Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the surfaces are now machined in a different direction.

2011 PTC

Module 15 | Page 5

11. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box.


12. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

Module 15 | Page 6

2011 PTC

16
se

nl

Creating Cut Line Surface Milling


Sequences

Module

Module Overview

rn

al

Cut line surface milling sequences enable you to create toolpaths that
gradually change the shape of the cuts according to the surface topology.
You can use cut line surface milling to create finish sequences for contoured
surfaces of components, or mold cavities.

Objectives

In

te

In this module, you learn about the cut line surface milling process and review
the key cut line surface milling manufacturing parameters. You then create
and edit cut line surface milling sequences.

Fo

rP
TC

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the cut line surface milling process.
Describe the key cut line surface milling manufacturing parameters.
Create and edit cut line surface milling sequences.

2011 PTC

Module 16 | Page 1

Cut Line Surface Milling


Cut line surface milling enables you to specify the shape of the
first, last, and optionally some intermediate cuts. The toolpath
gradually changes the shape of the cuts according to the surface
topology.
Cut Line Surface Milling Theory

nl

Mill surfaces using cut lines.


Toolpath gradually changes shape.
Open or closed cut lines.
Cut Line Surface Milling Parameters

Figure 1 Cut Line Surface Milling

U
al
rn

Figure 2 Multiple Cuts

te

NUMBER_CUTS
OFFSET_INCREMENT
LACE_OPTION
Lateral control:
STEP_OVER
TOOL_OVERLAP
SCALLOP_HGT

rP
TC

In

se

SCAN_TYPE
TYPE_1/2/3
TYPE_SPIRAL
TYPE_ONE_DIR
TYPE_HELICAL

PROF_STOCK_ALLOW

Fo

Figure 3 Stock Allowance


and Scallop Height

Cut Line Surface Milling Theory


The following features describe cut line surface milling:
You mill the selected surfaces by specifying the shape of the first, last, and
optionally some intermediate cut lines.
The generated toolpath gradually changes the shape of the cuts according
to surface topology.
Both open and closed cut lines are possible.

Cut Line Surface Milling Parameters


The following parameters control how a cut line surface milling sequence
is generated.

Module 16 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

SCAN_TYPE Refers to the method a milling tool uses to scan the


surfaces and avoid islands. For cut line surface milling, the options are:
TYPE_1 Continuously machines the surface, and retracts upon
encountering islands.
TYPE_3 The tool removes material from continuous zones defined by
the island geometry, machining them in turn and moving around the
islands.
TYPE_SPIRAL Generates a spiral cutter path.
TYPE_ONE_DIR The tool cuts in one direction only.
TYPE_HELICAL The tool moves along a helix. Valid for Closed Cut
Line machining only.
You can create multiple passes at different Z-heights, using
NUMBER_CUTS and OFFSET_INCREMENT.
LACE_OPTION If configured, causes the tool to cut back and forth and
specifies the shape of connection between the endpoints of neighboring
cuts.
Lateral control options include:
STEP_OVER The default parameter for controlling the step-over
within a pass.
TOOL_OVERLAP You can use this option as an alternative method to
control the step-over based on the tool overlap.
SCALLOP_HGT This must be less than or equal to cutter radius. It
can also be used to calculate step-over.
You should use whichever parameter produces the smallest
calculated step-over.
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW Controls the stock remaining on machined
surfaces. You can also use it to calculate remaining stock when you
create material removal features. For surface milling, this can be negative,
enabling machining into the reference model. However, this is useful when
you machine electrodes.

2011 PTC

Module 16 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Cut Line Surface Milling


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Surface_Cut-Line
Task 1:

CUT_LINE.ASM

Create a cut line surface milling sequence and edit parameter


values.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

se

nl

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab. Click Surface Milling


from
the Milling group.
Notice that in the SEQ SETUP menu, the Tool, Parameters,
Surfaces, and Define Cut check boxes are automatically selected.
Click Done.

3. Ensure that the 40_B_E_MILL tool is selected, and then right-click


and select Select tool and return.

te

rn

al

4. Edit the parameters for the NC sequence.


Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit STEP_OVER to 12.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1200. Click OK.

Fo

rP
TC

In

5. Configure the surface for


machining.
Click Model > Done.
Press CTRL and select the
four curved surfaces on the
top of the reference model, as
shown. Click OK.
Click Done/Return.
6. Configure the first open cut line.
Select the Cut Line option.

Click Add Cut Line .


Select One By One.
Press CTRL and select the
four upper surface edges, as
shown. Click OK.
Click Done.
Click OK in the Add/Redefine
Cut Line dialog box.
Notice that Cutline 1 is listed in
the Cut Definition dialog box.
Module 16 | Page 4

2011 PTC

nl
O
se
U

te

rn

al

8. From the menu manager, click


Play Path > Screen Play.
Click Play .

7. Configure the second open cut


line.
Click Add Cut Line .
Select One By One.
Press CTRL and select the
four lower surface edges, as
shown. Click OK.
Click Done.
Click OK in the Add/Redefine
Cut Line dialog box.
Click Preview.
Notice that you can preview
the machining scan to verify
your selections.
Click OK to complete the cut
line configuration.

In

Notice that the toolpath gradually changes shape between the start
and end cut lines.

rP
TC

9. Edit the number of cuts and offset increment parameters.


Click Step Parameters

10. If necessary, click the All button, and select All categories from the
Categories drop-down list.

Fo

11. Edit OFFSET_INCREMENT to 5.

12. Edit NUMBER_CUTS to 2.


13. Click OK.

14. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the toolpath now makes two passes offset by 5


millimeters.

2011 PTC

Module 16 | Page 5

15. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box.


16. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

Module 16 | Page 6

2011 PTC

17
O

nl

Advanced Surface Milling Options

Module

se

Module Overview

rn

al

Advanced surface milling options enable you to modify default surface milling
cut motions, and change toolpaths by specifying check surfaces and scallop
surfaces. You can use different methods to configure approach and exit
moves to modify surface milling default cut motions. You can also specify
check surfaces and configure surfaces to be ignored from scallop height
calculation.

Objectives

In

te

In this module, you learn the methods that you can use to modify default
surface milling cut motions. You then edit surface milling sequences using
different methods.

Fo

rP
TC

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the methods that you can use to modify default surface milling
cut motions.
Edit surface milling sequences using different methods.

2011 PTC

Module 17 | Page 1

Advanced Surface Milling Options


You can use various advanced options to modify default
surface milling cut motions. You can also change toolpaths by
specifying check surfaces.
Approach and Exit Moves

nl

Modify default cut motions


Entry Type
First cut/each cut
Exit Type
Last cut/each cut
Alternative Methods
Build Cut
Customize

se

Figure 1 Entry/Exit Move


Dialog Box

al
Figure 2 Entry and Exit Moves

Figure 3 Toolpath Adjusted


for Check Surfaces

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Check Surfs
Additional surfaces for gouge
checking
ScallopSrf
Exclude surfaces from scallop
height calculation

Check and Scallop Surface Options

Approach and Exit Moves


You can configure approach and exit moves to modify surface milling default
cut motions.
Default Cut Motions There are many times when additional approach
and exit moves are required to improve a toolpath. When creating NC
sequences, default cut motions are created based on selected geometry
and manufacturing parameters. You can modify these default cut motions
if required.
Entry and Exit Moves The Approach/Exit option in the sequence setup
menu provides access to the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
The Entry/Exit Move dialog box enables you to modify the default cut
motion. A number of options are available.

Module 17 | Page 2

2011 PTC

se

nl

You can select standard strategies for entry and exit.


You can specify different entry strategies for the first cut and
the intermediate cuts, as well as different exit strategies for the
intermediate cuts and the last cut.
You can also specify custom strategies for entry and exit.
Alternative Methods You can use two other methods to modify default
cut motions.
Build cut You can access this option from the sequence setup menu.
It provides access to build cut functionality where you can specify
approach and exit moves.
Customize You can access this option from the NC sequence
menu. You can also modify default cut motions using the customize
functionality. Various options in the Customize dialog box enable
you to specify approach and exit motions, edit individual cut motion
parameters, and remove unwanted cut motions.
Both options enable you to modify the existing cut motions and
specify approach and exit moves.

Check and Scallop Surfaces Options

rn

al

Two options in the sequence setup menu enable you to specify check
surfaces and ignore surfaces from scallop height calculation.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

Check Surfs You can select additional surfaces against which gouge
checking is performed. This is useful if you have fixtures and holding
components that can be gouged by a tool.
ScallopSrf You can select surfaces that are excluded from scallop
computation if SCALLOP_HGT is specified. This is useful if you have
surfaces at different angles, and you want to exclude specific surfaces
from the scallop computation.

2011 PTC

Module 17 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Advanced Surface Milling Options


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Surface_Advanced
Task 1:

ADVANCED.ASM

Gouge check the surface milling sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

se

nl

2. Select the STRAIGHT_CUT NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play. Click Play .

al

rn

3. Configure surfaces for gouge


checking.
From the Play Path menu,
click Gouge Check.

Notice that the toolpath may be gouging into the clamp at the
beginning and end of each pass. You can check and correct this.

In

te

4. Press CTRL and select the two


top surfaces on the clamp part.

rP
TC

5. Click OK > Done/Return >


Done/Return.

6. Click Run to perform a gouge


check.
7. Notice that gouges were found.

Fo

8. Click Show All to see all


detected gouges on the toolpath.

9. Click Done/Return >


Done/Return > Done/Return.

10. Configure check surfaces.


11. From the NC SEQUENCE menu,
click Seq Setup.
12. Select the Check Surfs check
box, and click Done.
13. Press CTRL and select the two
top surfaces on the clamp part,
as shown.
14. Click OK > Done/Return >
Done/Return.
Module 17 | Page 4

2011 PTC

15. Perform gouge checking again.


Click Play Path > Gouge Check.
16. Press CTRL and select the two
top surfaces on the clamp part,
as shown.
17. Click Done/Return >
Done/Return.
18. Click Run. Notice that no gouges
were found.

nl

19. Click Done/Return >


Done/Return.

20. Adjust the check surface stock allowance. Click Step Parameters

se

Create an approach and exit move.

In

Task 2:

te

rn

al

22. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the toolpath now
avoids the check surfaces.

21. Edit CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW to 2. Click OK.

1. Create tangent approach and exit moves.

rP
TC

2. From the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Seq Setup.

Fo

3. Select the Approach/Exit check box, and click Done.


Select LINE_TANGENT from the First Cut drop-down list.
Select LINE_TANGENT from the Last Cut drop-down list. Click OK.
4. Click Step Parameters

5. Click the All button.


6. Edit APPROACH_DISTANCE to 20.
7. Edit EXIT_DISTANCE to 20. Click OK.

2011 PTC

Module 17 | Page 5

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Play Path > Screen
Play. Click Play .
Zoom in to the beginning and
then the end of the toolpath.
Notice an approach move has
been added to the first pass,
and an exit move has been
added to the last pass.

nl

9. Click Close. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

This completes the procedure.

Module 17 | Page 6

2011 PTC

18
y

Module

se

nl

Creating Roughing and Re-roughing


Sequences
Module Overview

rn

al

Roughing sequences are similar to volume milling sequences. The difference


is that they are intended specifically for high speed mold machining, and
especially for machining imported, non-solid geometry. Roughing sequences
have additional capabilities aimed at producing more efficient toolpaths when
machining mold cavities or pockets.

In

te

Re-roughing NC sequences creates toolpaths to machine only the areas


where a previous roughing or re-roughing sequence could not reach.
Typically you perform them with a smaller tool and you machine the areas
that the larger roughing cutter could not enter due to its size.

rP
TC

In this module, you learn the differences between roughing and re-roughing
sequences, and review the key roughing manufacturing parameters. You
create and edit roughing and re-roughing sequences.

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the roughing and re-roughing process.
Describe the key roughing manufacturing parameters.
Create roughing sequences.
Create re-roughing sequences.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 1

Basic Roughing and Re-roughing


Roughing and re-roughing sequences are intended for high
speed mold machining, and for machining imported, non-solid
geometry. You can use these NC sequences to produce more
efficient toolpaths when machining mold cavities or pockets.
Roughing and Re-roughing Sequences Theory

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Roughing High speed mold machining and machining imported


geometry.
Remove material inside mill windows.
Scallop height control.
Automatic degouging.
Machine by cavity.
High speed roughing scans.
Open and closed area scans.
Open and closed area entry methods.
No automatic material removal.
Re-roughing Machines where previous roughing could not reach.
Use manufacturing geometry.
Typically use smaller tool.
No removal of scallops between slices.

Fo

Figure 1 Basic Roughing Toolpath

Figure 2 Basic Re-Roughing


Toolpath

Roughing and Re-roughing Sequences Theory


Roughing and re-roughing sequences are designed for high speed mold
machining, and for machining imported, non-solid geometry. Roughing and
re-roughing sequences can directly machine models containing facet data in
STL format.
The following features define roughing sequences.
Remove all material inside a mill window boundary, with additional depth
control based on the depth of the mill window.
Provide optional scallop height control.
Perform automatic degouging against all the surfaces of the reference
part.

Module 18 | Page 2

2011 PTC

nl

Perform zoning by cavity rather than by slice, which means that in case
of multiple cavities the tool completely machines one cavity before
moving to the next.
Support a variety of high speed roughing scans, with a minimum corner
radius control.
Enable a selection of different high speed scans for open and closed
areas, assessed on a slice-by-slice basis.
Provide different entry methods for open and closed areas. The tool
enters open areas from the side. For closed areas, you can specify
either helical or ramp top entry method.
Do not generate an automatic material removal feature. However, you
can manually create material removal features.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

Re-roughing NC sequences create toolpaths to machine only the areas


where a previous roughing sequence could not reach.
Typically you perform them with a smaller tool and you machine the
areas that the larger roughing cutter could not enter due to its size.
They do not attempt to remove scallops left between the slices of the
referenced sequence.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Basic Roughing and Re-Roughing


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Roughing
Task 1:

ROUGHING.ASM

Create a roughing NC sequence and edit parameter values.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.


from the Roughing drop-down menu in the

4. Click Tool Manager

in the Milling dashboard.

nl

3. Select Roughing
Milling group.

se

5. Ensure that the 25_FEM tool is selected, and then right-click and
select Select tool and return.

6. Click the Parameters tab in the Milling dashboard.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

7. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit STEP_OVER to 12.
Edit MAX_STEP_DEPTH to 25.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 2000.

Module 18 | Page 4

2011 PTC

8. Configure a mill window using


the Chain Window option.
Click References in the Milling
dashboard.
Click in Machining Reference
collector to select the geometry
to be machined.

rP
TC

nl
O
se
U

In

te

rn

al

in
Click Chain Window
the dashboard.
Select the top surface of
the model as the window
placement plane, as shown.
Right-click and select Chain to
activate the selection of edges.
Select one of the inner chain of
edges at the top of the pocket,
as shown.
Press SHIFT and select
another edge in the loop, as
shown.
Notice that the tangent chain
of edges highlights on the
model, as shown.
Click Complete Feature .

Select Mill Window Tool


from the Geometry drop-down
menu in the Milling dashboard.

9. Click Resume Feature

Fo

10. Review the resulting toolpath.


In the Milling dashboard, click
Display Toolpath
Click Play .

Notice that the toolpath roughs out the pocket with a 25 millimeter
flat end mill.
11. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
12. Click Complete Feature

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 5

Task 2:

Create a re-roughing NC sequence and reference the previous


roughing sequence.

1. Click Re-Rough
from the Milling group.
Ensure that the Roughing 1 sequence is selected.
in the Milling dashboard.

2. Click Tool Manager

te

In

Display Toolpath
Click Play .

rn

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


In the Milling dashboard, click

al

se

5. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit STEP_OVER to 7.
Edit MAX_STEP_DEPTH to 20.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 2000.

nl

4. Click the Parameters tab in the Milling dashboard.

3. Select the 15_FEM tool, and then right-click and select Select tool
and return.

rP
TC

Notice that the tool machines only the areas where the previous
roughing sequence could not reach.
7. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
8. Click Complete Feature

Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 18 | Page 6

2011 PTC

Roughing Scans and Entry and Exit Parameters


For roughing sequences, there are a number of parameters that
control the roughing scan type. You can also vary the entry and
exit methods for closed and open areas.

nl

se

al

Entry and Exit Methods

Figure 1 CLOSED_AREA_SCAN
= CONSTANT_LOAD

OPEN_AREA_SCAN and
CLOSED_AREA_SCAN
CONSTANT_LOAD (default for
closed areas)
MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE
MAINTAIN_CUT_DIRECTION
FOLLOW_CONTOUR (default
for open areas)
TYPE_SPIRAL
TYPE_3

High Speed Roughing Scans

rn

OPEN_AREA_ENTRY
Tool enters from open side.
CLOSED_AREA_ENTRY
TANGENT_HELIX or RAMP

Figure 3 CLOSED_AREA_SCAN
= TYPE_SPIRAL

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

Figure 2 CLOSED_AREA_SCAN
= MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE

High Speed Roughing Scans


A number of parameters enable the selection of different high speed scans for
open and closed areas. These scans are assessed on a slice-by-slice basis.
The controlling parameters are OPEN_AREA_SCAN and
CLOSED_AREA_SCAN. You can configure them with the following values.
CONSTANT_LOAD (default for closed areas) Creates a cutter path
that produces an approximately constant tool load.
MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE Creates a spiral cutter path with reverse arc
connections between cuts. This option minimizes retracts.
MAINTAIN_CUT_DIRECTION Creates a spiral cutter path with
S-shape connections between cuts. This option minimizes retracts.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 7

FOLLOW_CONTOUR (default for open areas) The shape of each cut


follows the shape of the hard walls, maintaining fixed offset between the
respective points of two successive cuts.
TYPE_SPIRAL Creates a spiral toolpath around all islands.
TYPE_3 Lace type toolpath where cutter machines zone by zone.

Entry and Exit Methods

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

These provide different entry and exit methods for open and closed areas.
The tool enters open areas from the side. For closed areas, you can
specify either a helical or ramp top entry method.
The controlling parameters are CLOSED_AREA_ENTRY and
OPEN_AREA_ENTRY.
For CLOSED_AREA_ENTRY, you can edit the approach and exit move
to TANGENT_HELIX or RAMP.

Module 18 | Page 8

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Roughing Scans and Entry and Exit


Parameters
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Roughing_Scan
Task 1:

ROUGH_SCAN.ASM

Edit parameters relating to rough scanning in an existing roughing


sequence.

nl

For clarity, no workpiece has been configured.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

rn

al

se

2. Select the ROUGHING NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

In

te

Note, for the manufacturing parameter CLOSED_AREA_SCAN,


the default value is CONSTANT_LOAD. This produces a toolpath
with an approximately constant tool load. Alternatively, you can
use MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE and MAINTAIN_CUT_DIR values to
minimize retract moves during the toolpath.

rP
TC

3. Edit the closed area scan parameter.


Click Step Parameters

Fo

4. Select MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE from the CLOSED_AREA_SCAN


drop-down menu.
Click OK.
5. Review the resulting toolpath.
Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the retract moves have been minimized.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 9

6. Edit the closed area scan parameter.


Click Step Parameters

7. Select MAINTAIN_CUT_DIR from the CLOSED_AREA_SCAN


drop-down menu.
Click OK.

se

Notice that the cut direction has been maintained.

nl

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

9. Edit the closed area scan parameter.

Click Step Parameters

rn

al

10. Select TYPE_SPIRAL from the CLOSED_AREA_SCAN drop-down


menu.
Click OK.

rP
TC

In

te

11. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice a spiral scan is created.

Fo

12. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
13. Click Done Seq.

This completes the procedure.

Module 18 | Page 10

2011 PTC

Step Depth and Tolerance Control Roughing


Parameters
For roughing sequences, there are a number of parameters that
control the step depth and tolerance control.
Improved Tolerance Control

Based on the maximum and


minimum Z-heights in the mill
window
MAX_STEP_DEPTH
MIN_STEP_DEPTH

Tolerance options
INSIDE_TOLERANCE
OUTSIDE_TOLERANCE

rn

al

se

nl

Step Depth Calculations

Figure 2 Tolerance Control

te

Figure 1 Step Depth


Calculation

In

Step Depth Calculations

Fo

rP
TC

You perform additional step depth calculations for roughing and


re-roughing. The step depth calculation is based on the maximum and
minimum Z-heights in the mill window and the MAX_STEP_DEPTH
parameter value.
MAX_STEP_DEPTH Specifies the maximum allowed step depth.
After finding the positions of the highest and lowest slices, the system
calculates the actual step depth, which is less than or equal to the
specified MAX_STEP_DEPTH and results in a minimum number of
uniformly spaced slices.
MIN_STEP_DEPTH Enables you to specify the minimum step depth
allowed between the slices.

Improved Tolerance Control


Tolerance defines the maximum distance that the straight line path of the
tool can deviate from the curved geometry.
The tolerance band is normally symmetric. In roughing and re-roughing,
you can specify different tolerance values for INSIDE_TOLERANCE and
OUTSIDE_TOLERANCE.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Step Depth and Tolerance Control


Roughing Parameters
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Roughing_Depth
Task 1:

DEPTH_TOL.ASM

Edit parameters relating to step depth and tolerance control in


an existing roughing sequence.

nl

For clarity, no workpiece has been configured.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

rn

al

se

2. Select the ROUGHING NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

In

te

The MAX_STEP_DEPTH is currently equal to 25. You can reduce


this value to reduce the step depth in the NC sequence, and
increase the number of slices in the NC sequence.
3. Edit the step depth parameter.

rP
TC

Click Step Parameters

4. Edit MAX_STEP_DEPTH to 15.


Click OK.

Fo

5. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the number of slices has increased, and the step depth
is now no more than 15 millimeters.

Module 18 | Page 12

2011 PTC

6. Edit the tolerance parameters.


Click Step Parameters

7. Edit INSIDE_TOLERANCE to 0.04.


8. Edit OUTSIDE_TOLERANCE to 0.07.
Click OK.

Notice that you can independently modify the inside and outside
tolerance values. This is not possible with volume milling
sequences.

nl

9. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 13

Additional Scallop Height Control Roughing


Parameters
Scallop height control enables you to generate a semi-finishing
toolpath with the same tool and during the same roughing
sequence.
Additional Scallop Height
Control

se

nl

Optional extra slices


ROUGH_SCALLOP_
CONTROL
NO
DURING
DURING_BOTTOM_UP
AFTER
ROUGH_SCALLOP

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

Figure 1 Scallop Height Control

Figure 2 No Scallop Height


Control

Figure 3 With Scallop Height Control

Fo

Additional Scallop Height Control

After the first roughing sequence, the resulting scallop height does
not always leave a constant thickness of material to remove for any
subsequent finishing toolpaths. Rough scallop control enables you to
generate a semi-finishing toolpath with the same tool and during the
same NC sequence. This results in a smaller scallop height, and leaves
a uniform thickness of remaining material that you can use to create
subsequent finishing toolpaths.
ROUGH_SCALLOP_CONTROL Controls whether extra slices are
created between regular roughing slices, and defines the machining order.
NO No extra slices are generated to control the scallop height.
DURING Creo Parametric generates the extra slices and inserts them
between the regular slices.

Module 18 | Page 14

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

DURING_BOTTOM_UP Creo Parametric generates the extra slices


and inserts them between the regular slices, machining them from the
bottom up to optimize the tool load.
AFTER Creo Parametric generates the extra slices. The tool machines
all the regular slices first, and then machines the extra slices to reduce
the scallop height, where needed.
ROUGH_SCALLOP Maximum scallop height for the steps between the
regular slices.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Additional Scallop Height Control


Roughing Parameters
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Scallop_Height
Task 1:

SCALLOP_HGT.ASM

Edit parameters relating to scallop height control in an existing


roughing sequence.

nl

For clarity, no workpiece has been configured.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

rn

al

se

2. Select the ROUGHING NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

rP
TC

In

te

Notice that the tool makes two passes in the pocket. The pocket
has a draft angle of 5 degrees, which means there is an uneven
thickness of material remaining in the pocket. You can use
the scallop height control parameters to create a more uniform
thickness of remaining material to create subsequent finishing
toolpaths.
3. Edit the step scallop height control parameters.
Click Step Parameters

4. If necessary, click the All button.

Fo

5. Select DURING from the ROUGH_SCALLOP_CONTROL drop-down


menu.

6. Edit ROUGH_SCALLOP to 0.5.


Click OK.

Module 18 | Page 16

2011 PTC

7. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
If necessary, drag the Display
Speed slider to the left to slow
down the toolpath simulation.

nl

Notice that the number of slices has increased, as the step depth
is now controlled by the ROUGH_SCALLOP parameter. Notice
also additional slices are taken during the roughing toolpath. You
can control when the additional slices are taken by editing the
ROUGH_SCALLOP_CONTROL parameter value.

se

Click Step Parameters

8. Edit the ROUGH_SCALLOP_CONTROL parameter value.

al

9. Select AFTER from the ROUGH_SCALLOP_CONTROL drop-down


menu.
Click OK.

In

te

rn

10. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
If necessary, drag the Display
Speed slider to the left to slow
down the toolpath simulation.

rP
TC

Notice that although the toolpath is essentially the same, the


additional slices are made after the first roughing passes are made.

11. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

Fo

12. Click Done Seq.

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 17

Roughing Corner Options


When you rough a surface, you can add a filleting move to a
sharp corner. You can also create slowdown motions before a
corner and ramp up motions after a corner.

nl

se

Figure 1 No Toolpath Filleting

Add a filleting move to a sharp


corner
SMOOTH_SHARP_
CORNERS
NO
CONSTANT_RADIUS
RADIUS_BY_ANGLE
MAX_RADIUS
SMOOTH_RADIUS

Toolpath Filleting

rP
TC

rn

In

te

Slowdown motions and ramp


up motions
CORNER_SLOWDOWN
SLOWDOWN_LENGTH
SLOWDOWN_PERCENT
NUMBER_SLOWDOWN_
STEPS

al

Progressive Slowdown for


Corners

Figure 2 Toolpath Filleting Applied

Toolpath Filleting

Fo

You can add a filleting move to a sharp corner. This option is available for
roughing, re-roughing, volume milling, and local milling.
SMOOTH_SHARP_CORNERS Specifies the way sharp toolpath corners
are rounded while machining. The options are:
No A rounding radius is not used while machining sharp toolpath
corners. This is the default.
CONSTANT_RADIUS Rounds sharp corners using a rounding radius
having a value equal to that of the SMOOTH_RADIUS parameter.
RADIUS_BY_ANGLE Rounds sharp corners using a rounding
radius having a value based on the angle of the sharp corner and the
SMOOTH_RADIUS value.
MAX_RADIUS Rounds sharp corners using the largest possible radius
between 10% and 100% of the SMOOTH_RADIUS value.
SMOOTH_RADIUS Specifies the radius for filleting or smooth corner
machining.
Module 18 | Page 18

2011 PTC

The minimum value must be 10% of the tool diameter if the


SMOOTH_SHARP_CORNERS parameter is defined and not set to
CONSTANT_RADIUS.
The maximum allowable value is 50% of the step-over distance.

Progressive Slowdown for Corners

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

You can create slowdown motions before a corner and ramp up motions
after a corner. A number of parameters control the tool movement.
CORNER_SLOWDOWN Specifies the use of a progressive slowdown
in the feed rate before a corner followed by an acceleration to the cut
feed rate after the corner. The default is NO.
SLOWDOWN_LENGTH Specifies the length of the move for the
slowdown. The same length is used for the acceleration after the
corner. The length is measured from the sharp edge or the beginning of
the rounding fillet, if any. If one of the edges is an arc, the distance is
taken along the arc.
SLOWDOWN_PERCENT Specifies the feed rate at the end of the
slowdown. For example, if the cut feed rate is 300 millimeters per minute
and the value of the SLOWDOWN_PERCENT is 10, then the feed rate
at the end of the slowdown is 30 millimeters per minute.
NUMBER_SLOWDOWN_STEPS Specifies the number of steps in
which the slowdown takes place. A larger number of steps results
in a smoother slowdown. At each step, the feed rate is reduced by
(100SLOWDOWN_PERCENT)/NUMBER_SLOWDOWN_STEPS.
During acceleration after the corner, the number of steps is halved.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 19

PROCEDURE - Roughing Corner Options


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Roughing_Corner
Task 1:

CORNER_OPTIONS.ASM

Edit parameters relating to corner options in an existing roughing


sequence.

For clarity, no workpiece has been configured.

al

se

2. Select the ROUGHING NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

nl

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

te

rn

Sharp corners are currently configured in this toolpath. You can add
smooth corners by editing corner option parameters.

In

3. Edit corner option parameters.


Click Step Parameters

rP
TC

4. Select CONSTANT_RADIUS from the SMOOTH_SHARP_CORNERS


drop-down menu.
5. Edit SMOOTH_RADIUS to 6.
Click OK.

Fo

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the sharp corners have now been rounded, and the
smooth radius value is equal to 6 millimeters. You can also
configure progressive slowdown for corners.

Module 18 | Page 20

2011 PTC

7. Create slowdown motions for corners by editing parameters.


Click Step Parameters

8. Select YES from the CORNER_SLOWDOWN drop-down menu.


9. Select 10 from the SLOWDOWN_LENGTH drop-down menu.
10. Select 0.5 from the SLOWDOWN_PERCENT drop-down menu.
11. Select 4 from the NUMBER_SLOWDOWN_STEPS drop-down menu.
Click OK.

nl

12. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click the CL Data bar to make
the CL data visible.

rn

al

se

Click Next Record


repeatedly to step through the
toolpath one move at a time.

13. Click Play

In

te

Observe the feed rate slow down when approaching corners and
increase when moving out of corners, as shown.
to complete reviewing the toolpath.

rP
TC

14. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
15. Click Done Seq.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 18 | Page 21

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 18 | Page 22

2011 PTC

Creating Finishing Sequences

19
nl

Module

se

Module Overview

You can use finishing sequences to machine components after roughing


and re-roughing. Finishing sequences create optimized toolpaths that use a
combination of horizontal and vertical slicing motions.

rn

al

In this module, you learn about the finishing process, and review the key
finishing manufacturing parameters. You create and edit finishing sequences.

te

Objectives

Fo

rP
TC

In

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the finishing sequence process.
Describe the key finishing sequence manufacturing parameters.
Create and edit finishing sequences.

2011 PTC

Module 19 | Page 1

Basic Finishing
You can use finishing sequences to machine components after
roughing and re-roughing. You can also use them to directly
machine models containing non-solid geometry.
Finishing Sequences

Reference mill windows.


Create after roughing and
re-roughing.
Directly machine STL data.

nl

Figure 1 Basic Finishing Toolpath

Cut Types

se

Vertical Slices
Horizontal Slices
Combined

al
rn

Figure 2 Steep and Shallow


Machining Areas

In

te

Specify areas for machining.


Steep
Shallow

Slope Angle Parameter

Finishing Sequences

Fo

rP
TC

Finishing sequences reference mill windows and you can use them
to machine components after roughing and re-roughing. They create
optimized finishing sequences that use a combination of horizontal and
vertical slicing toolpaths.
You can also use them to machine models containing faceted data in STL
format.

Cut Types

Finishing functionality provides an automated method to create


combinations of vertical and horizontal slicing toolpaths within specific
manufacturing constraints.
Vertical slice machining produces straight, curved, or circular cuts
projected onto the geometry being machined.
Horizontal slicing toolpaths are in the form of Z-profile cuts.
You can specify whether only one of these techniques is used or a
combination of both.

Module 19 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Slope Angle Parameter

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

The SLOPE_ANGLE parameter specifies the angle dividing all the surfaces
being machined into two areas, steep (near vertical) and shallow (near
horizontal).
You can then use other manufacturing parameters, specific to finishing NC
sequences, to further control the resulting toolpath, specifically:
To machine just the steep or the shallow area or both.
To include flat (horizontal) surfaces into the shallow area.
To configure the slicing algorithm used in each area.
To configure how to perform connections and entry moves.

2011 PTC

Module 19 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Basic Finishing


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Finish
Task 1:

BASIC_FINISH.ASM

Create a finishing NC sequence and edit parameter values.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

in the Milling dashboard.

4. Click Tool Manager

nl

from the Milling group.

3. Click Finishing

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.

se

5. Select the 14_BEM tool, and then right-click and select Select tool
and return.

te

rn

al

6. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Select the Parameters tab in the Milling dashboard.
Edit CUT_FEED to 500.
Edit STEP_OVER to 4.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 2000.

Fo

rP
TC

In

7. Select a mill window.


Select the References tab in
the Milling dashboard.
Click in the Machining
Reference collector to select
geometry to be machined.
Select the Mill Window 1
on the reference model, as
shown.
8. Review the resulting toolpath.
Click Display Toolpath
the Milling dashboard.
Click Play .

in

Notice that the toolpath finishes the surface at the bottom of the
pocket first and then finishes the side walls of the pocket.
9. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
10. Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.


Module 19 | Page 4

2011 PTC

Editing Finishing Parameters


You can use finishing sequence parameters to specify how the
vertical and horizontal slicing toolpaths are created within a
finishing sequence.
Finishing Parameters

te

rn

al

se

nl

SLOPE_ANGLE Divides steep and shallow areas.


FINISH_OPTION Specifies machining method.
STRAIGHT/PROFILE/SHALLOW/COMBINED
SHALLOW_AREA_SCAN Scanning method for shallow areas.
STEEP_CONNECT_OPTION Method for connecting profile slices.
FINISHING_ORDER Shallow/steep area.
FLAT_AREA Method of machining flat areas.

In

Figure 1 Finish Option:


PROFILE_CUTS

Figure 2 Finish Option:


SHALLOW_CUTS

rP
TC

Finishing Parameters

The following is a list of key manufacturing parameters that control finishing


sequences.

Fo

SLOPE_ANGLE The angular value with respect to the XY plane that


divides the surfaces to be machined into steep (near vertical) and shallow
(near horizontal) areas. The default is 45 degrees.
FINISH_OPTION This specifies the machining method for creating the
optimized toolpath.
STRAIGHT_CUTS_WITH_CROSSCUT Creates a crosscut toolpath,
machining both the steep and shallow areas in a series of straight cuts,
in the direction controlled by the CUT_ANGLE parameter.
PROFILE_CUTS Machines the steep areas only, using the profile cuts.
SHALLOW_CUTS Machines the shallow areas only, according to the
SHALLOW_AREA_SCAN parameter value.
COMBINED_CUTS (default) Uses a combination of cuts. Machines
the steep areas using the profile cuts. Machines the shallow areas
according to the SHALLOW_AREA_SCAN parameter value.
SHALLOW_AREA_SCAN Specifies the scanning algorithm for
the shallow area if FINISH_OPTION is set to COMBINED_CUTS or
SHALLOW_CUTS.
2011 PTC

Module 19 | Page 5

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

SPIRAL_SCAN (default) Uses connected concentric loops that start


along the perimeter of the area and move toward the center, with
S-shaped connections between the loops.
STRAIGHT_SCAN Uses straight cuts in the direction controlled by the
CUT_ANGLE parameter.
SPIRAL_3D_EQUIDISTANT Uses constant 3-D STEP_OVER, that
is computed based on the curve or curves limiting the shallow area,
along the surface.
STEEP_CONNECT_OPTION Specifies the method of connecting profile
slices when machining the steep area.
S_CONNECT (default) The tool makes an S-shaped movement while
connecting two consecutive slices.
LINE_CONNECT The tool moves in a straight line from the end of the
previous slice to the start of the next slice.
RETRACT The tool retracts between slices.
FINISHING_ORDER If you are machining both the steep and the shallow
areas, this specifies the order of machining.
SHALLOW_AREA_FIRST (default) Machines the shallow area first.
STEEP_AREA_FIRST Machines the steep area first.
FLAT_AREA If the geometry to be machined contains a flat area (parallel
to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system), you can specify
how to machine it by using the following options.
FLAT_INCLUDED (default) Machines the flat area together with the
shallow area.
FLAT_EXCLUDED Does not machine the flat area.
FLAT_ONLY Machines only the flat area by applying the algorithms
specified for the shallow area.

Module 19 | Page 6

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Editing Finishing Parameters


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Finish_Parameters
Task 1:

FINISH_PARAMS.ASM

Edit finishing parameters in an existing finishing sequence.


For clarity, no workpiece has been configured.

se

nl

2. Select the FINISHING NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

te

rn

al

Notice that the toolpath finishes the surface at the bottom of the
pocket with a spiral scan and then finishes the side walls of the
pocket with profile cuts. You can change the way the pocket is
machined using various parameters.

In

3. Change the finishing order.


Click Step Parameters

rP
TC

4. If necessary, click the All button.


5. Select STEEP_AREA_FIRST from FINISHING_ORDER drop-down
menu.
Click OK.

Fo

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the toolpath now
machines the side walls first.
7. Machine only shallow areas and change the shallow area scan.
Click Step Parameters

8. Select SHALLOW_CUTS from the FINISH_OPTION drop-down


menu.
9. Select STRAIGHT_SCAN from the SHALLOW_AREA_SCAN
drop-down menu.
Click OK.

2011 PTC

Module 19 | Page 7

10. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the toolpath now machines only the shallow area,
and scans the shallow area using straight cuts. Note, the
SLOPE_ANGLE parameter divides the surfaces to be machined
into steep and shallow areas. The default value is 45 degrees.

Click Step Parameters

nl

11. Machine only steep areas.

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

13. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the toolpath now
machines only the steep area.
Zoom in to the toolpath, as
shown.
Notice that the tool makes
S-shaped moves between
connecting slices.

se

12. Select PROFILE_CUTS from the FINISH_OPTION drop-down menu.


Click OK.

14. Change the type of connecting moves for profile cuts.


Click Step Parameters

Fo

15. Select LINE_CONNECT from the STEEP_CONNECT_OPTION


drop-down menu.
Click OK.
16. Review the resulting toolpath.
Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Zoom in to the toolpath, as
shown.
Notice that the tool makes
straight line moves between
connecting slices.

Module 19 | Page 8

2011 PTC

17. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
18. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 19 | Page 9

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 19 | Page 10

2011 PTC

20
y

Module

nl

Creating Trajectory Milling Sequences

se

Module Overview

rn

al

Trajectory milling enables you to sweep a tool along any user-defined


trajectory. During the trajectory milling process, you must configure the
trajectory for the tool to follow. You can use trajectory milling sequences for
milling slots where the shape of the tool corresponds to that of the slot. You
can also use them to chamfer edges. You can either use an edited tool or you
can sketch your own tool for the sequence. This enables you to specify the
tool control point anywhere on the tool.

In

te

In this module, you learn the different methods used to create trajectory
milling sequences and review the key trajectory milling parameters. You
create trajectory milling sequences using different methods and learn how to
create and use sketched tools in trajectory milling sequences.

rP
TC

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the trajectory milling process.
Describe different methods of creating trajectory milling sequences.
Describe how to create sketched tools.
Create trajectory milling sequences using different methods.
Create sketched tools.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 1

Understanding Trajectory Milling


Trajectory milling enables you to sweep a tool along any
user-defined trajectory. You can use it for milling slots or
chamfers.
Trajectory Milling Theory

Sketched or Edited Tools

nl

se

Figure 1 3-Axis Trajectory Milling

al

3- to 5-Axis Trajectory Milling


Interactively configure
trajectory.
Create cut motions.
More advanced options.

Two Types
2-Axis Trajectory Milling
Select or sketch a curve.
Curve must be planar.
Simple to use.
Automatic material removal.

rn

Figure 2 2-Axis Trajectory Milling

rP
TC

In

te

Edited Tools
Sketched Tools User-defined
tool control point.

Figure 3 Sketched Tool

Fo

Trajectory Milling Theory


There are two types of trajectory milling sequences:

2-Axis Trajectory Milling


To configure the toolpath for 2-axis trajectory milling, you sketch or
select a curve that represents the final trajectory of the control point
of the tool.
The curve must lie in the plane normal to the Z-axis of the NC sequence
coordinate system.
In the simplest case, the tool makes just the one cutting pass along this
trajectory, with or without tool offset.
This type of trajectory milling sequence also benefits from automatic
material removal.
3- to 5-Axis Trajectory Milling

Module 20 | Page 2

2011 PTC

To configure the toolpath for 3- to 5-axis trajectory milling, you must


interactively specify the trajectory of the control point of the tool by
creating cut motions using the customize functionality.

Sketched or Edited Tools

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

You can use either edited tools or sketch your own tool for the NC
sequence.
If you sketch a tool, you can create a user-defined control point for the tool.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 3

Creating Sketched Milling Tools


Trajectory milling sequences enable you to sketch a tool. This
enables you to create a user-defined tool cross-section and
specify a non-standard control point for the tool.
Sketched Tools Theory

se

nl

Create a sketch during tool


configuration.
Tool Features
Sketch as revolved solid.
Half tool cross-section.
Right side of axis of symmetry.
Sketch must be closed.
Tool control point:
Sketcher coordinate system.

al

te

rn

Specify during tool configuration.


Left, right, or none.
Offset half cutter diameter.
Tool center or tool edge cutter
compensation.

Figure 1 Sketched Tool

rP
TC

In

Tool Offset Tool control point offset


from trajectory

Figure 2 Tool Offset

Sketched Tools Theory

Fo

You create sketched tools by configuring a sketch within the Tool Setup
dialog box.
The following features describe sketched tools.
You sketch the tool as a revolved protrusion.
The sketch represents half of the tool cross-section.
The whole sketch must lie on one side of the axis of symmetry.
The axis of symmetry must be vertical, with the sketch lying on the right.
The sketch must be closed.
You can specify a control point other than its tip by adding a Sketcher
coordinate system to the tool sketch. For edited tools, and for sketched
tools with no control point specified, you use the tip of the tool.

Tool Offset
You can specify whether the tool control point is offset from the trajectory,
depending on your requirements. The following features describe the tool
offset.
Module 20 | Page 4

2011 PTC

You can specify the offset during cut motion creation.


The offset can be left/right or none.
The offset is equal to half the cutter diameter.
You can also change cutter compensation from tool center to tool edge
when configuring the workcell.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Creating Sketched Milling Tools


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Sketch_Tool
Task 1:

SKETCH_TOOL.ASM

Create a sketched key way tool.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display type:

se

3. Create a sketched tool.


Click Edit > Sketch in the Tools Setup dialog box.
Type KEY_WAY_35_0 in the Name text box.
Click the Sketcher button to open Sketcher.

nl

2. Click Cutting Tools


from the Machine Tool Setup group to open
the Tools Setup dialog box.

4. Sketch the tool section.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

from the
Click Centerline
Centerline drop-down menu in
the Sketching group.
Sketch a vertical centerline, as
shown.
Click Line Chain .
Sketch the tool outline, as
shown.
Middle-click to stop sketching
lines.

Module 20 | Page 6

2011 PTC

al

se

nl

5. Dimension the sketch.


Right-click and select
Dimension.
Dimension the sketch, as
shown. Note your dimension
values will vary from those
shown.
Middle-click to stop creating
dimensions.
Edit the dimensions, as shown.

rn

6. Add a Sketcher coordinate


system to specify the tool tip.

rP
TC

In

te

Click Coordinate System


from the Sketching group.
Select a location for the
coordinate system on the
sketch, as shown.
Middle-click to stop creating
Sketcher coordinate systems.

Fo

from the Quick


Click Save
Access toolbar.
Click OK to save the section.
Click OK .

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 7

7. Finalize the tool configuration.


In the Tools Setup dialog box,
click Apply.
Click OK to complete the tool
configuration.

nl

You can save the sketched tool configuration with the workcell
ready for future use, or save it with the manufacturing model.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

This completes the procedure.

Module 20 | Page 8

2011 PTC

Basic 2-Axis Trajectory Milling


In 2-Axis trajectory milling, you specify the tool trajectory by
sketching or selecting a curve that represents the final trajectory
of the tool.

nl

se

Figure 1 Datum Curve and Height


Same

Figure 2 Alternative Height


Specified

te

Parameter Configuration

rn

al

Specify a curve to represent the


final tool trajectory.
Configure
Depth
Multiple Passes
Multiple Slices
Options
Datum Curve
Start Height
Height
Direction
Offset
Material Side

2-Axis Trajectory Milling


Configuration

Fo

rP
TC

In

Lead In and Lead Out


Cutter Compensation

Figure 3 Offset Left, Right, or


None

2-Axis Trajectory Milling Configuration

In 2-axis trajectory milling, you specify the tool trajectory by specifying a


curve that represents the final trajectory of the tool.
You can adjust the depth of the final pass and specify multiple cutting
passes with a vertical offset. You can also create multiple trajectory milling
slices that are horizontally offset from the final tool trajectory.
You can specify a number of options when you configure a 2-axis trajectory
milling sequence.
Datum Curve You need to select or create a datum curve that lies in
a plane normal to the Z-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
You can create the datum curve before or during the creation of the
trajectory milling sequence.
Start Height Select the height from which you want the tool tip to start.
2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 9

Height Adjust the depth of the final pass of the tool by selecting a
plane. By default, Pro/ENGINEER uses the datum curve plane.
Direction You can specify the direction of trajectory.
Offset Specify the direction in which the cut motion is offset (none, left,
or right). The offset distance is half of the cutter diameter.
The direction of the offset corresponds to the direction of trajectory.
When you select an offset option, the arrow shows the offset direction.
Material Side If the offset direction is none, then you can specify the
material side to be left or right.

nl

Parameter Configuration

You can configure many parameters to control the toolpath; however, a


number of important parameters control lead in and lead out motions and the
application of cutter compensation.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

Lead In and Lead Out


LEAD_IN/LEAD_OUT If configured to YES, then the tool makes lead
in and lead out motions.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP Linear distance of the tangent section of a
lead in or lead out motion.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP Linear distance of the normal section of a
lead in or lead out motion.
LEAD_RADIUS Radius value of the tangent circle move for lead-in
or lead-out.
Cutter Compensation
CUTCOM Turns cutter compensation on or off in the CL data file.
You can configure the workcell to specify whether the cutter
compensation is toward the tool center (default) or the tool edge.

Module 20 | Page 10

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Basic 2-Axis Trajectory Milling


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\2-Axis
Task 1:

2_AXIS_TRAJ.ASM

Create a 2-axis trajectory milling sequence and configure


sequence options.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.

4. Click Tool Manager

nl

3. Select 2 Axis Trajectory from the Trajectory Milling drop-down menu


in the Milling group.
in the Milling dashboard.

se

5. Ensure that the 20_0_FEM tool is selected, and then right-click and
select Select tool and return.

te

rn

al

6. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Select the Parameters tab.
Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1000. Click OK.

Fo

rP
TC

In

7. Specify the trajectory by


selecting a curve.
Select the References tab.
Click in the Machining
Reference collector to select
the datum curve.
Select the datum curve on the
model, as shown.
Select the Offset Cut check
box.
You can also create a datum curve when configuring a 2-axis
trajectory milling sequence.

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Display Toolpath
the Milling dashboard.
Click Play .

in

Notice that the toolpath makes one pass at the curve depth. You
can specify an alternative depth if required.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 11

9. Click Resume Feature

10. Click in the Height collector to


add item.
11. Select the datum plane OFFSET
in the model tree.

nl

12. Click Display Toolpath


in
the Milling dashboard.
Click Play .
Notice that the height of the
toolpath has updated.

to edit the following parameters for the

al

13. Click Resume Feature


NC sequence.

se

You can configure lead in and lead out motions and apply cutter
compensation to the toolpath.

14. Select the Parameters tab. Click Edit Machining Parameters

In

te

rn

necessary, click the All button.


Select YES from the LEAD_IN drop-down menu.
Select YES from the LEAD_OUT drop-down menu.
Edit TANGENT_LEAD_STEP to 30.
Edit NORMAL_LEAD_STEP to 30.
Select ON from the CUTCOM drop-down menu. Click OK.

rP
TC

15. If

Fo

16. Click Display Toolpath


in
the Milling dashboard.
Click the CL data bar to make
the CL data visible.
Click Next Record
to single
step through the toolpath.

Notice that the lead in and lead out motions have been added to
the toolpath. Notice also cutter compensation is applied during the
lead in motion, and removed during the lead out motion.

Module 20 | Page 12

2011 PTC

17. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
18. Click Complete Feature

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 13

2-Axis Trajectory Milling Depth Control


Parameters
There are many parameters that control the depth of cut when
creating 2-axis trajectory milling sequences.
Depth Control Parameters

NUMBER_LAST_FINPASSES
NUMBER_FIRST_FINPASSES
LAST_FINPASS_OFFSET
FIRST_FINPASS_OFFSET

nl

WALL_FINISH_CUT
PERCENT_LENGTH

In

te

rn

al

se

Figure 1 Depth Control


Parameters

rP
TC

Figure 2 Depth Control Parameters

Depth Control Parameters

Fo

The following group of parameters controls the number of cutting passes of


the tool, offset in the vertical (Z-axis) direction from the final tool trajectory,
and the offsets between the passes. You can have two groups of passes
with different offset values.

NUMBER_LAST_FINPASSES Specifies the number of cutting passes


offset in the vertical direction from the final tool trajectory. The default is 1,
in which case the tool makes just the one cutting pass along the trajectory
curve. If you increase the number, the vertical offset between the passes is
defined by the LAST_FINPASS_OFFSET parameter value.
NUMBER_FIRST_FINPASSES Specifies additional cutting passes,
made prior to the last passes and with a different vertical offset. The default
is 0. If you specify a number, the vertical offset between the passes is
defined by the FIRST_FINPASS_OFFSET parameter.
LAST_FINPASS_OFFSET Specifies the vertical offset between the
cutting passes in the final group. The default is 0.
FIRST_FINPASS_OFFSET Specifies the vertical offset between the
cutting passes in the first group, and between the last of these passes and
Module 20 | Page 14

2011 PTC

the first of the passes in the final group. The default is 0. Specify a value if
you set a non-zero number of first passes.
Two other parameters relate to depth control.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

WALL_FINISH_CUT Determines whether the tool makes multiple cutting


passes when machining along walls. By default (AT_EACH_DEPTH),
the finish passes are made at each cutting depth, that is, the last slice
machining the walls contains the same number of passes as any other
slice. If set to LAST_CUT_DEPTH, then the last slice contains only one
cutting pass made at final depth.
PERCENT_LENGTH Provides a control point mechanism for the tool by
indicating the percentage of taper cutting length below the tool control
point. The value can be any number between 0 and 1. A value of 0 means
tip machining, 1 is shoulder machining, and an intermediate value provides
an intermediate control point. The default is 0.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - 2-Axis Trajectory Milling Depth Control


Parameters
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\2-Axis_Depth
Task 1:

DEPTH_TRAJ.ASM

Edit the depth control parameter values in a trajectory milling


sequence.

al

se

nl

2. Select the TRAJECTORY


MILLING NC sequence in the
model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

rn

Notice that one pass is made at the same depth as the datum curve
selected for this sequence.

te

3. Edit the last finish pass parameters.

In

Click Step Parameters

4. If necessary, click the All button.

rP
TC

5. Edit NUMBER_LAST_FINPASSES to 3.
6. Edit LAST_FINPASS_OFFSET to 5.
7. Click OK.

Fo

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the tool now makes three passes. One is at the same
depth as the datum curve, and two are offset from the final pass by
5 millimeters, as shown.

Module 20 | Page 16

2011 PTC

9. Edit the first finish pass parameters.


Click Step Parameters

10. Edit NUMBER_FIRST_FINPASSES to 3.


11. Edit FIRST_FINPASS_OFFSET to 10.
12. Click OK.

nl

13. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

al

Click Named Views


from
the In Graphics toolbar.
Select the named view
FRONT.

se

14. Change the view orientation.

Click Repaint
toolpath.

te

rn

to see the

In

Notice that the tool now makes three additional passes, offset from
each other by 10 millimeters, as shown.

rP
TC

15. Press CTRL + D to return to the standard orientation.


16. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
17. Click Done Seq.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 17

2-Axis Trajectory Milling Cutting Slices


Parameters
There are many parameters that control the number of cutting
slices when creating 2-axis trajectory milling sequences.
Cutting Slices Parameters Control
cutting slices and offset values.

nl

SLICE_PASS_SCAN Machining
order
NUMBER_LAST_FINCUTS
NUMBER_FIRST_FINCUTS
LAST_FINCUT_OFFSET
FIRST_FINCUT_OFFSET

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

Figure 1 Cutting Slices


Parameters

Figure 2 Cutting Slices Parameters

Fo

Cutting Slices Parameters


These parameters control the number of cutting slices, offset in the
horizontal direction from the final tool trajectory, and the offsets between
the slices. Each slice may contain multiple vertically offset cutting passes,
with their number and offsets the same in each slice and defined by the
depth control parameters.
If you specify both multiple slices and multiple passes, the order of
machining is controlled by the SLICE_PASS_SCAN parameter.
NUMBER_LAST_FINCUTS Specifies the number of cutting slices offset
in the horizontal direction from the final tool trajectory. The default is 1.
If you increase the number, the system generates multiple horizontally
offset slices, with each slice containing the same number of vertically offset
cutting passes, as specified by the appropriate parameters. The horizontal
offset between the slices is defined by the LAST_FINCUT_OFFSET
parameter value.
Module 20 | Page 18

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

NUMBER_FIRST_FINCUTS Specifies additional cutting slices, made


prior to the last slices and with a different horizontal offset. The default is 0.
If you specify a number, the horizontal offset between the slices is defined
by the FIRST_FINCUT_OFFSET parameter value.
LAST_FINCUT_OFFSET Specifies the horizontal offset between the
cutting slices in the final group. The default is 0.
FIRST_FINCUT_OFFSET Specifies the horizontal offset between the
cutting slices in the first group, and between the last of these slices and the
first of the slices in the final group. The default is 0. Specify a value if you
set a non-zero number of first slices.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 19

PROCEDURE - 2-Axis Trajectory Milling Cutting Slices


Parameters
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\2-Axis_Slices
Task 1:

SLICES_TRAJ.ASM

Edit cutting slices parameter values in a trajectory milling


sequence.

al

se

nl

2. Select the TRAJECTORY


MILLING NC sequence in the
model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

rn

Notice that one pass is made offset by half the tool diameter from
the datum curve selected for this sequence.

te

3. Edit the last finish cuts parameters.

In

Click Step Parameters

4. If necessary, click the All button.

rP
TC

5. Edit NUMBER_LAST_FINCUTS to 3.
6. Edit LAST_FINCUT_OFFSET to 5.
7. Click OK.

Fo

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the tool now makes three passes. One is offset by half
the tool diameter from the datum curve, and two are offset from
each other by 5 millimeters, as shown.

Module 20 | Page 20

2011 PTC

9. Edit the first finish cuts parameters.


Click Step Parameters

10. Edit NUMBER_FIRST_FINCUTS to 2.


11. Edit FIRST_FINCUT_OFFSET to 10.
12. Click OK.

nl

13. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

al

Click Named Views


from
the In Graphics toolbar.
Select the named view TOP.

se

14. Change the view orientation.

to see the

te

rn

Click Repaint
toolpath.

In

Notice that the tool now makes two additional cutting slices, offset
from each other by 10 millimeters, as shown.

rP
TC

15. Press CTRL + D to return to the standard orientation.


16. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
17. Click Done Seq.

Fo

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 21

Basic 3-Axis Trajectory Milling


In 3-axis trajectory milling, you specify the tool trajectory by
creating cut motions using the customize functionality.
3-Axis Trajectory Milling
Configuration

nl

Figure 1 Sketch

al

se

Figure 2 Edge

Figure 3 Curve

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Create cut motions


Trajectory Options
Sketch/Edge/Curve/Surface
Cut motion Options
Specify Trajectory
Direction
Offset
Start Height
Height
Material Side
Customize Options Low-level
control

Figure 5 Surface

Figure 4 Customize Approach and


Exit Moves

Fo

3-Axis Trajectory Milling Configuration


To configure the toolpath, you must specify the trajectory of the control
point of the tool by creating cut motions using the customize functionality.
You can specify the trajectory type using the following options.
Sketch Sketch a trajectory.
Edge Use model edges.
Curve Use datum curves.
Surface Use surfaces (at a specified height).
After you specify the trajectory type, you then need to configure the cut
motion options from the following list. Note, you can configure some or all
of these options depending on the selected trajectory type.
Configure Trajectory
You can configure a sketch, edge, curve, or surface.
Direction You can specify the direction of trajectory.
Module 20 | Page 22

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Offset Specify the direction in which the cut motion is offset (none, left,
or right). The offset distance is half of the cutter diameter.
The direction of the offset corresponds with the direction of trajectory.
When you select an offset option, the arrow shows the offset direction.
Start Height Select the height from which you want the tool tip to start.
Height Adjust the depth of the final pass of the tool by selecting a
plane. By default, Creo Parametric uses the height of the configured
trajectory reference.
Material Side If the offset direction is none, then you can specify the
material side to be left or right.
Within the Customize dialog box, there are many options to provide more
low-level control over the toolpath. For example:
You can add or remove cut motions.
You can modify feed rates.
You can add user-defined approach and exit motions.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 23

PROCEDURE - Basic 3-Axis Trajectory Milling


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\3-Axis
Task 1:

3_AXIS_TRAJ.ASM

Create a 3-axis trajectory milling sequence and configure cut


motion options.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.

al

se

3. Click Custom Trajectory


from the Milling group.
Notice that 3 Axis is selected in the MACH AXES menu manager.
Click Done.
Notice that in the SEQ SETUP menu, the Tool and Parameters
check boxes are automatically selected.
You must configure these items to generate a toolpath.
Click Done.
in the Milling dashboard.

4. Click Tool Manager

te

rn

5. Ensure that the FEM_15 tool is selected, and then right-click and
select Select tool and return.

rP
TC

In

6. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1000.
Click OK.

Fo

7. Specify the cut motion configuration.


Click Insert in the Customize dialog box to insert an automatic cut
motion.
Click Edge > Done.
Ensure that the Edge, Direction, and Offset check boxes are
selected.
Click Done.

Module 20 | Page 24

2011 PTC

nl
O
se
U

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

9. Add approach and exit moves.


Select cut motion 3: Follow
Cut, as shown.
Select Tangent Approach
from the Cut Motion drop-down
list.
Type 10 in the Approach
Distance text box.
Click OK in the Tangent
Approach dialog box.
Select <end of tool path> in
the Customize dialog box.
Select Tangent Exit from the
Cut Motion drop-down list.
Type 10 in the Exit Distance
text box.
Click OK in the Tangent Exit
dialog box.
Notice the cut motion list in
the Customize dialog box, as
shown.
Click OK in the Customize
dialog box.

8. Create the cut motion.


Press CTRL and select the
three edges of the slot on the
model, as shown.
Click OK > Done.
Click Okay to specify the
direction.
Click Right > Done to specify
the offset.
Notice a cut motion appears,
as shown.
Click Done Cut.

10. Review the resulting toolpath.


From the menu manager, click
Play Path > Screen Play.
Click Play .

You can configure sketch, curve, and surface trajectories using a


similar procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 25

11. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
12. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

Module 20 | Page 26

2011 PTC

3-Axis Trajectory Milling Multi-Step and


Multi-Pass Parameters
There are a number of parameters that enable you to create
multi-step and multi-pass 3-axis trajectory milling sequences.
Multi-Step Configuration

nl

NUMBER_CUTS
STEP_DEPTH
Final pass along specified
trajectory
Start Height
Height

Figure 1 Multi-Step Parameters

rP
TC

U
al

In

te

rn

NUM_PROF_PASSES
PROF_INCREMENT
Final pass along specified
trajectory

se

Multi-Pass Configuration

Figure 2 Multi-Pass Parameters

Multi-Step Configuration

Fo

You can create multi-step trajectory milling by specifying the desired


STEP_DEPTH and NUMBER_CUTS.
The last pass coincides with the specified trajectory.
Start Height You can use Start Height to specify an alternative start height
to the top of the workpiece.
Height You can use Height to specify an alternative final height of the
toolpath.

Multi-Pass Configuration
You can perform multi-pass trajectory milling (a succession of trajectory
passes with horizontal offset) by using the NUM_PROF_PASSES and
PROF_INCREMENT parameters.
The last pass coincides with the specified trajectory.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 27

PROCEDURE - 3-Axis Trajectory Milling Multi-Step and


Multi-Pass Parameters
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\3-Axis_Step-Pass
Task 1:

STEP_PASS.ASM

Edit multi-step parameter values in a trajectory milling sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

se

nl

2. Select the CUSTOM


TRAJECTORY MILLING NC
sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click Play .

rn

al

Notice that one pass is made at the same depth as the trajectory
edge selected for this sequence.

te

3. Edit the multi-step parameters.


Click Step Parameters

In

4. If necessary, click the All button.


5. Edit NUMBER_CUTS to 3.

rP
TC

6. Edit STEP_DEPTH to 10.


7. Click OK.

Fo

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Notice that the tool now makes three passes, one at the final depth
of the trajectory, and two offset from the final pass by 10 millimeters,
as shown.
9. Edit the multi-pass parameters.
Click Step Parameters

10. Edit NUM_PROF_PASSES to 2.


11. Edit PROF_INCREMENT to 10.
12. Click OK.
Module 20 | Page 28

2011 PTC

13. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

14. Change the view orientation.

nl

Click Named Views


from
the In Graphics toolbar.
Select the named view TOP.

to see the

Click Repaint
toolpath.

se

Notice that the tool now makes one additional pass at each step
depth, offset from the final pass by 10 millimeters, as shown.
15. Press CTRL + D to return to the standard orientation.

al

16. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

rn

17. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 20 | Page 29

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 20 | Page 30

2011 PTC

21
O

nl

Creating Holemaking Sequences

Module

se

Module Overview

te

rn

al

Holemaking sequences enable you to create many different types of drilling


cycles for machining. During the holemaking process, you need to select
the appropriate cycle type. These include standard drilling, boring, tapping,
reaming, and countersink drill cycles. It is important to understand when you
should use each type of drill cycle. Another important stage in the holemaking
process is creating hole sets that define the holes to be drilled. If you need to
perform a series of holemaking sequences on the same set of holes, you can
configure a drill group that simplifies the selection process.

rP
TC

In

In this module, you learn about the holemaking process and review the key
holemaking parameters. You also understand the different drill cycle types
and hole selection methods. You create holemaking sequences and learn
how to create drill groups relevant to holemaking.

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the holemaking process.
Describe the key holemaking manufacturing parameters.
Describe different drill cycle types and hole selection methods.
Create holemaking sequences.
Create drill groups relevant to holemaking.

2011 PTC

Module 21 | Page 1

Understanding Holemaking
Holemaking enables you to create many different types of drilling
cycles including standard, countersink, tapping, and reaming.
Cycle Types

Output CYCLE/XXXX in CL data.


Drill
Standard/Deep/Break
Chip/Web/Back
Face
Bore
Countersink
Tap
Fixed/Floating
Ream
Custom

nl

al

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Figure 1 Holemaking Example

se

Select the drill cycle type.


Select a tool.
Configure holemaking parameters.
Configure the set of holes to be
machined.
Customize hole connections
(optional).

Holemaking Process

Figure 2 Drill Cycle Types

Holemaking Process

Fo

You can create holemaking sequences by completing the following steps.


Select the appropriate holemaking cycle type, for example, deep drilling
or reaming.
Select an appropriate holemaking tool.
Configure the holemaking manufacturing parameters.
Configure the set of holes to be machined, by selecting the holes and
specifying depth options.
If required, specify the method for connecting the holes.

Cycle Types
Depending on the cycle type you select, a different CYCLE/XXXX statement is
output in the CL data file. You can configure a number of different cycle types.
Drill Drill a hole. Depending on the additional option you select, the
following statement is output to the CL file.
Module 21 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Standard (default) CYCLE/DRILL.


Deep CYCLE/DEEP.
Break Chip CYCLE/BRKCHP.
Web CYCLE/THRU (for multiple plates).
Back GOTO and SPINDLE statements for back spotting.
Face Drill a hole with an optional dwell at final depth to help ensure a
clean surface at the bottom of the hole. The CYCLE/FACE statement is
output to the CL file.
Bore Bore a hole to create a finish hole diameter with high precision. The
CYCLE/BORE statement is output to the CL file.
Countersink Drill a chamfer for a countersunk screw. The CYCLE/CSINK
statement is output to the CL file. If you select the Back option together
with Countersink option, the system performs back countersinking.
Tap Drill a threaded hole. Pro/NC supports ISO standard thread output.
The CYCLE/TAP statement is output to the CL file. Two additional options
are available.
Fixed The feed rate is determined by the combination of thread pitch
and spindle speed.
Floating Enables you to modify the feed rate using the parameter
FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR.
Ream Create a precision finish hole. The CYCLE/REAM statement is
output to the CL file.
Custom Create and use your own customized cycles for the current
machine tool.

2011 PTC

Module 21 | Page 3

Basic Drilling
You can create many different types of drilling sequences by
selecting the holes for drilling and configuring the drill depth
options.

al

se

nl

Figure 1 Selecting Holes

rn

Figure 2 Depth Options

rP
TC

In

te

Selecting Holes
Axes
Points
Diameters
Surfaces
Parameters
Groups
Depth Options
Blind
Auto
Thru All
Shoulder/Tip
Countersink Drilling
Start Surface
Countersink Diameter
Auto Chamfer

Configure Hole Sets

Figure 3 Countersink Drilling

Configuring Hole Sets

Fo

When creating drilling sequences, you need to configure the hole sets for
drilling. This involves specifying a number of options.
Selecting holes You can select the holes to drill using any combination of
the following methods.
Axes Specify holes by selecting individual hole axes.
Points Specify drill locations by selecting datum points or reading in a
file with datum point coordinates.
Diameters Specify holes by selecting diameter value(s).
Surfaces Specify holes by selecting surfaces of the reference part or
workpiece.
Parameters Select holes with a certain parameter value.
Groups Select predefined drill groups. You can define groups of holes
at setup time for later use in Holemaking NC sequences. This simplifies
later hole selection.
Depth options You need to configure depth options as part of the hole set
configuration process. You can configure many different depth options.
Module 21 | Page 4

2011 PTC

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Blind Drill from the start surface (or Z-height) to specified depth.
Specify the start and end surfaces (by either selecting a surface or
typing a Z-depth).
Auto Depth of drilling is determined automatically, by referencing
hole geometry.
Thru All Drill a through hole from the retract surface all the way through
the workpiece(s) or reference part(s) that the hole intersects.
The Tool Depth option buttons, Shoulder and Tip, available for blind
and auto drilling, determine whether the drilling depth references the
shoulder or the tip of the tool.
Countersink Drilling A number of specific options enable you to configure
countersink drilling cycles.
The depth for countersink drilling is defined by the start surface and
the countersink diameter value, specified at the time of configuring the
hole set.
The countersink diameter is the final diameter of the hole after drilling.
This diameter is measured on the start surface.
Auto Chamfer Instead of typing a countersink diameter, you can
specify that Creo Parametric automatically finds all the applicable
chamfers and makes the necessary calculations.

2011 PTC

Module 21 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Basic Drilling


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Drilling
Task 1:

BASIC_DRILL.ASM

Create a countersink drilling sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Mill tab.

4. Click Tool Manager

in the Holemaking dashboard.

nl

3. Select Countersink
from the Countersink drop-down menu in the
Holemaking Cycles group.

se

5. Select the SPOT_DRILL_20 tool, and then right-click and select


Select tool and return.

te

rn

al

6. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Select the Parameters tab.
Edit CUT_FEED to 150.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 500. .

Fo

rP
TC

In

7. Configure the holes for


countersinking.
Select the References tab.
Select the Auto Chamfer
check box. Notice four axes
are added to the axes list,
and the holes highlight on the
model, as shown.
Click in the Start collector to
specify the start depth.
Select the top surface of the
model as the start surface, as
shown.
Type 20 in Countersink
diameter value text box, and
press Enter.

Module 21 | Page 6

2011 PTC

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Display Toolpath
in
the Holemaking dashboard.
If necessary, click the CL
data bar to make the CL data
visible. Click Play .

se

Create a standard drilling sequence.

1. Click Standard

in the Holemaking Cycles group.


in the Holemaking dashboard.

al

2. Click Tool Manager

Task 2:

in the Holemaking dashboard.

10. Click Complete Feature

nl

9. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

Notice that the four holes are drilled and a CYCLE/CSINK statement
is output in the CL data.

rn

3. Select the 10_0_DRILL tool, and then right-click and select Select
tool and return.

rP
TC

In

te

4. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Select the Parameters tab.
Edit CUT_FEED to 200.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1500.

Fo

5. Configure the holes for drilling.


Select the References tab.
Select the Details button.
Select the 10 diameter in the
.
available list and click Add
Select the Depth tab in the
Holes dialog box.
Notice in the Depth tab that
the Auto and By Shoulder
depth options are configured
by default, as shown.
Click Done
dialog box.

2011 PTC

in the Holes

Module 21 | Page 7

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Display Toolpath
in
the Holemaking dashboard.
Click Play .
Notice that the four holes are drilled and a CYCLE/DRILL statement
is output in the CL data.

in the Holemaking dashboard.

nl

8. Click Complete Feature

7. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

This completes the procedure.

Module 21 | Page 8

2011 PTC

Editing Drilling Toolpaths


You can edit drilling toolpaths by configuring holemaking
manufacturing parameters. You can also use customize
functionality to specify the tool movement between drilling
holes.

nl
O
se
U

rn

Connect Motions

Figure 1 Holemaking Parameters

al

SCAN_TYPE
TYPE_1
TYPE_SPIRAL
TYPE_ONE_DIR
PICK_ORDER
SHORTEST (default)
BREAKOUT_DISTANCE
PECK_DEPTH
CLEAR_DIST
RAPTO_DIST
PULLOUT_DIST

Holemaking Parameters

In

te

Insert connect motions between


holes.

Holemaking Parameters

rP
TC

The following is a list of key manufacturing parameters that control


holemaking sequences.

Fo

SCAN_TYPE Calculates the order for drilling selected holes. Options


available are:
TYPE_1 Increments the Y-coordinate and goes back and forth in
the X-direction.
TYPE_SPIRAL Goes clockwise starting from the hole nearest to the
coordinate system.
TYPE_ONE_DIR Increments the X-coordinate and decrements the
Y-coordinate.
PICK_ORDER The holes are drilled in the same order as they are
selected.
SHORTEST Creo Parametric determines which order of holes results
in the shortest machine motion time. This is the default value.
BREAKOUT_DISTANCE This adds the BREAKOUT_DISTANCE value to
the Z-depth in the CYCLE statements associated with holes drilled with the
Thru All option, and with through-holes drilled using the Auto Depth option.
PECK_DEPTH The depth increment for each drilling pass. Default
value is 0. If you select DEEP drilling, you have to specify a non-zero
PECK_DEPTH.
2011 PTC

Module 21 | Page 9

CLEAR_DIST The clearance distance above the top of the hole at which
the PLUNGE_FEED ends and the CUT_FEED begins.
RAPTO_DIST Enables further rapid advance from CLEAR_DIST toward
the top of the hole.
PULLOUT_DIST Enables the tool to return to a point other than that
defined by CLEAR_DIST.

Connect Motions

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

You can use the Connect cut motion in the Customize dialog box to
configure specific connection moves between holes during drilling.

Module 21 | Page 10

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Editing Drilling Toolpaths


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Drilling_Editing
Task 1:

EDIT_DRILL.ASM

Edit parameters relating to holemaking in an existing holemaking


sequence.

For clarity, no workpiece has been configured.

nl

1. Enable only the following Datum

se
U

te

rn

al

2. Select the HOLEMAKING NC


sequence in the model tree.
Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
Click Play Path > Screen
Play.
Click the CL Data bar to make
the CL data visible.
Click Play .

Display type:

rP
TC

In

Notice that the four holes are drilled, and the CYCLE/DRILL
statement is output with a clearance of 5 millimeters, as shown. You
can change the CYCLE/DRILL statement by editing manufacturing
parameters.
3. Edit parameters relating to rapid moves and pullout distances.
Click Step Parameters

4. If necessary, click the All button.

Fo

5. Edit PULLOUT_DIST to 10.


6. Edit RAPTO_DIST to 2.
7. Click OK.

8. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .
Notice that the DRILL/CYCLE statement is now output with RAPTO
and RETURN information added, as shown.

2011 PTC

Module 21 | Page 11

9. Edit the SCAN_TYPE parameter to change the order of drilling the


holes.
Click Step Parameters

10. Select TYPE_1 from the SCAN_TYPE drop-down menu.


Click OK.

nl

11. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

12. Edit the SCAN_TYPE parameter again.


.

Click Step Parameters

se

Notice that the tool now drills the holes in a different order. It
increments the Y-coordinate and goes back and forth in the
X-direction.

al

13. Edit SCAN_TYPE to TYPE_ONE_DIR.

rn

14. Click OK.

In

te

15. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Screen Play.
Click Play .

Fo

rP
TC

Notice that the tool now drills the holes in a different order. It
increments the X-coordinate and decrements the Y-coordinate. You
can specify which holes are drilled and change the order that the
holes are drilled using the Customize functionality.

Module 21 | Page 12

2011 PTC

16. From the NC SEQUENCE menu,


click Customize.
17. Select the cut motion 1:
Automatic Cut and click Delete.
18. Click Yes to confirm deletion.
19. Enable Axis Display

20. Select Connect from the Cut


Motion drop-down list.

nl

21. Select axis A_2 and A_4 from


the model, as shown.
22. Click OK.

se

23. Notice the two connect cut


motions listed in the Customize
dialog box, as shown.

te

rn

al

25. Click Play Path > Screen Play.


Click Play .
Notice that only two holes are
drilled.

24. Click OK.

In

26. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.
27. Click Done Seq.

Fo

rP
TC

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 21 | Page 13

Creating and Using Drill Groups


You can configure groups of hole axes within drill groups.
You can then select drill groups when creating holemaking
sequences. This simplifies the hole selection process.
Drill Groups Theory
Simplify hole selection.
Drill group updates.

nl

Configuring Drill Groups

se

Selecting holes:
Axes
Diameters
Surfaces
Parameters

te

rn

al

Figure 1 Drill Groups Dialog Box

In

Figure 2 Highlighted Selection

rP
TC

Drill Groups Theory

Fo

You can configure groups of hole axes either before creating holemaking
sequences or during the creation of holemaking sequences. Drill groups
have the following features.
Simplify hole selection Once you configure a drill group, you can
select it for any holemaking sequence by just selecting its name from a
name-list menu.
Drill group updates Modifying a drill group updates all NC sequences
that reference the modified group.

Configuring Drill Groups


Selecting holes You can select the holes for a drill group using any
combination of the following methods.
Axes Specify holes by selecting individual hole axes.
Diameters Specify holes by selecting diameter value(s).
Surfaces Specify holes by selecting surfaces of the reference part or
workpiece.
Parameters Select holes with a certain parameter value.

Module 21 | Page 14

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using Drill Groups


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Drilling_Groups
Task 1:

PLATE.ASM

Create a drill group for a center-drilling sequence.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl
O
se
U

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

Click Drill Group


from
the Manufacturing Geometry
group.
Click Create.
Type Center_Drill in the Drill
Group Name text box.
Ensure that the Axes tab is
selected.
Select the Pattern option, and
click Add.
Select the hole on the plate
model, as shown. Click OK in
the Select dialog box.
Notice that four axes are
added to the list.
Select the Diameters tab.
Click Add.
Select the 8.000000 diameter
and click OK.
Click Preview. Notice six axes
highlight on the model, as
shown.
Click OK in the Drill Group
dialog box.
Click Done/Return.

2. Configure the drill group for


center-drilling.
In the ribbon, select the Mill
tab.

2011 PTC

Module 21 | Page 15

Task 2:

Create a center-drilling sequence.

1. Click Standard

from the Holemaking Cycles group.

2. Click Tool Manager

in the Holemaking dashboard.

nl

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

5. Configure the holes for


countersinking.
Select the References tab.
Click Details.
Ensure that CENTER_DRILL
group is available in the
Selected list.
Select the Depth tab in the
Holes dialog box.
From the Start drop-down list,
.
click Select Start Surface
Select the top surface on the
model, as shown.
From the End drop-down list,
click Depth Blind
.
Type 4 in the End Value text
box, and press ENTER.
Select By Tip from the
Measure drop-down list.

se

4. Edit the required parameters for the NC sequence.


Select the Parameters tab.
Edit CUT_FEED to 150.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 500.

3. Select the C_DRILL_01 tool, and then right-click and select Select
tool and return.

Click Done
dialog box.

in the Holes

6. Review the resulting toolpath.


Click Display Toolpath
in
the Holemaking dashboard.
Click Play .
Notice that the six holes are
center-drilled, as shown.

Module 21 | Page 16

2011 PTC

7. Edit the drill group.


Click Resume Feature .
Select the References tab.
Click Details.
Select Individual Axes.
Select the hole at the center of
the plate model, as shown.
in the Holes

Click Done
dialog box.

O
se
U

in
Click Display Toolpath
the Holemaking dashboard.
Click Play .
Notice that seven holes are
now center-drilled, as shown.

nl

8. Review the resulting toolpath.

rn

10. Click Complete Feature

al

9. Click Close in the Play Path dialog box when finished.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 21 | Page 17

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 21 | Page 18

2011 PTC

Using the Process Manager

22
nl

Module

se

Module Overview

rn

al

The process manager is based on the process table, which lists all the
manufacturing process objects, such as workcells, operations, fixture setups,
tooling, and NC sequences. Each NC sequence listed in the process
table is called a step. The process manager enables you to create new
manufacturing objects such as workcells and NC sequences and modify the
properties of existing objects.

In

te

You can also configure manufacturing templates based on existing NC


sequence steps. You can then use these templates to create new NC
sequence steps in different models. The process manager is an important
tool that streamlines creating and managing toolpaths.

rP
TC

In this module, you learn about the capabilities of the process manager. You
create and edit process steps using the process manager. You also create
and use manufacturing templates using the process manager.

Objectives

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the capabilities of the process manager.
Create and edit process steps using the process manager.
Create and use manufacturing templates using the process manager.

2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 1

Using Process Manager Tools


The process manager enables you to create new manufacturing
objects such as workcells and NC sequences and modify the
properties of existing objects.
Process Manager Theory

Process Table Tools

Process Table Table-based view


of manufacturing model.
NC Sequences = process steps.
Create and edit manufacturing
objects.
Process Table Features
View Types
Custom Views
Sorting and Filtering Views

Figure 2 Printable Reports

In

te

Figure 1 Process Table

rn

al

se

nl

Highlighting References
Show Step Parameters
Toolpath Simulation
Compute Step Time
Printable Reports
CSV Files

Process Manager Theory

Fo

rP
TC

The Process manager functionality is based on the process table, which


lists all the manufacturing process objects, such as workcells, operations,
fixture setups, tooling, and NC sequences.
When NC sequences are listed in the process table, they are called
steps.
The process table provides tools for creating new objects and editing
existing objects. Objects that you can create and edit include workcells,
operations, fixtures, and NC sequences.
The process table has many features including the following.
View Types Selecting a table view enables you to display specific
process information in the process table. There are three categories
of views.
Process Views of the current process order.
Step Info Customized layouts enabling process engineers to
perform selections or make decisions.
Resources Views of the current resources defined in the process.
Custom Views For each category, the main view is a default view
generated by Pro/ENGINEER. You can modify the default views, as
well as define additional custom views, by using the View Builder
functionality.
Module 22 | Page 2

2011 PTC

The View Builder functionality enables you to define custom views


of the process table by selecting process elements and parameters
to display and specifying the column layout.
When working with View Builder, you can create and modify views
only in the current view category (Process, Steps, or Resources).
Sorting and filtering of view information This is possible in the Steps
view and Resources view.

Process Table Tools

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Various tools are available within the process table that provide users with
useful information. These tools include:
Highlighting References Selecting a step in the process table and
clicking the highlight icon displays the references used to create the
step, for example, retract plane and geometry references.
Show Step Parameters You can show step parameters in an
information window.
Toolpath Simulation You can display the toolpath for an operation, a
single step, or multiple steps. You must completely define all steps.
When you display a toolpath for an operation, only steps that are
completely defined are included.
Compute Step Time You can compute machining time and machining
distance for a step only if it is completely defined. To view the results
of step time computation, make sure to include the machining time
column in your table view.
Printable Reports You can create printable reports based on any view
in the process table. The reports appear in the browser window, and you
can print them using standard browser print functionality.
CSV Files You can export process table views in CSV format (as a
comma delimited text file), which is a standard format for Microsoft
Excel. You can then import CSV files into Microsoft Excel and format
them further, as required.

2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Using Process Manager Tools


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Process_Tools
Task 1:

PLATE_NC.ASM

Review NC sequence steps using the process manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl

from

Process Manager
the Process Group.

2. Review the operation toolpath.


In the ribbon, select the
Manufacturing tab. Click

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

4. Click Show Toolpath


.
Click the CL Data bar to make
the CL data visible.
To slow down the toolpath
simulation, drag the display
speed slider to the left.
Click Play .
Notice that both holes are
drilled with three tools: center
drill, drill, and countersink drill.
Click Close when finished.

se

3. In the Manufacturing Process


Table dialog box, select the
operation row, as shown.

Fo

5. Highlight step references.


Select the CDRILL_20_1 step,
as shown.
Click Highlight References
.
Notice that the references for
this step appear, as shown.

Module 22 | Page 4

2011 PTC

6. Click Step Parameters .


Review the parameters in the
Information window.
Click Close from the
Information window.
Note, you can configure
custom views to display other
manufacturing information.

Click New View .


Type View_1 in the View Name text box.

nl

Click View Builder

7. Create a custom process view.

se

8. Select Tool in the Not Displayed area and click Add Column

9. Select Mfg Info Parameters from the Group drop-down list.


10. Select Machining Time (Min.) and click Add Column

rn

al

11. Select 2 for the decimal places.


12. Click OK to save the view.

rP
TC

In

te

13. Click File > Create Printable


Version.
Notice that in the browser
window, a printable version of
the table appears, as shown.
Minimize the browser window.
14. Change the main steps view.
Click Steps

Fo

15. Click View Builder

16. Select the Sort Setup tab.

17. Select Tool and click Add


Column .
18. Select the Filter Setup tab.
19. Select Axes.
20. Type 3 Axes in the text box
below the values area.
21. Click Add.
22. Click OK to update the Steps
Info Main View.
Notice that the table has
updated, as shown.

2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 5

23. Click File > Export table (csv).


24. Click OK to create a CSV file.
25. Click Process

to return to the process view.

26. Click Close in the Manufacturing Process Table dialog box.

You can export process table views in CSV format, which is a


standard format for Microsoft Excel. You can then import CSV files
into Excel and format them further, as required.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

This completes the procedure.

Module 22 | Page 6

2011 PTC

Editing Process Items


The process table enables you to reorder and merge steps. You
can also modify the configuration of an existing step in the
process table.
Editing Process Items

Reordering Steps
Process view only
Cut/Copy/Paste

se

nl

Merging Steps
Holemaking Steps

al
Figure 2 Editing Tools

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Edit Existing Steps


Tool
Parameters
Geometry References
Retract Plane
Steps supported include:
Facing
Profiling
Roughing
Re-roughing
Finishing
Corner Finishing
Holemaking
Trajectory Milling

Figure 1 Editing Steps

Editing Process Items

Reordering steps In the process view, you can reorder steps using the
Cut, Copy, and Paste tools.
You can select multiple steps, but they must be consecutive in the
process view.
When pasting steps, the limits of where you can insert them are
highlighted (in red) in the process table. This is dependent on the
interdependencies between steps.
Merging steps You can merge several holemaking steps together to
optimize the toolpath.
The resulting merge group generates a toolpath that machines all the
holes included in all the merged steps.
2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 7

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

The steps must be consecutive in the process view and must be


completely configured. The steps must also be in the same operation
and use the same tool.
Editing existing steps You can modify the configuration of an existing step
in the process table.
You can edit many items including tools, manufacturing parameters,
geometry references, and NC sequence retract planes.
Editing of steps applies to some NC sequences including facing,
profiling, roughing, re-roughing, finishing, corner finishing, holemaking,
and trajectory milling.
Editing of other step types such as volume milling opens the menu
manager.

Module 22 | Page 8

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Editing Process Items


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Process_Edit-Steps
Task 1:

EDIT_STEPS.ASM

Reorder and merge steps using the process manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl

2. Open the process table.


In the ribbon, select the
Manufacturing tab. Click

se
U

In

te

rn

al

3. Reorder the center drill steps.


Select the CDRILL_20_2 step,
right-click, and select Cut.
Select the CDRILL_20_1 step,
right-click, and select Paste.
Notice that the order of steps
updates, as shown.

from
Process Manager
the Process Group.
Observe the order of the steps,
as shown.

Fo

rP
TC

4. Reorder the standard drill steps.


Select the DRILL_20_2 step,
right-click, and select Cut.
Select the DRILL_20_1 step,
right-click, and select Paste.
Notice that the order of steps
updates, as shown.
5. Merge the center drill steps.
Select the CDRILL_20_1 step,
press CTRL, and select the
CDRILL_20_2 step.
Right-click and select Merge.
Notice that the two steps have
been merged into a single
step, as shown.

2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 9

6. Merge the standard drill steps.


Select the DRILL_20_1 step,
press CTRL, and select the
DRILL_20_2 step.
Right-click and select Merge.
Notice the two steps have
been merged into a single
step, as shown.

nl
O
se
U

al

rn

8. Review the operation toolpath.


In the Manufacturing Process
Table dialog box, select the
operation row, as shown.

7. Merge the countersink drill steps.


Select the CSINK_20_1 step,
press CTRL, and select the
CSINK_20_2 step.
Right-click and select Merge.
Notice that the two steps have
been merged into a single
step, as shown.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

9. Click Show Toolpath


.
Click the CL Data bar to make
the CL data visible.
To slow down the toolpath
simulation, drag the display
speed slider to the left.
Click Play .
Notice each tool is used to drill
both holes before changing to
the next tool.
Click Close when finished.

10. Click Close in the Manufacturing Process Table dialog box.


This completes the procedure.

Module 22 | Page 10

2011 PTC

Creating New Items in the Process Manager


You can insert and configure many different types of items in
the process table, including operations, workcells, fixtures, and
NC sequences (steps).
Creating New Items

al

se

nl

Figure 1 Inserting a Workcell

Figure 2 Inserting a Milling Step

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Inserting Items
Operations
Fixtures
Workcells
Inserting NC Steps
Facing and Profiling
Roughing and Re-roughing
Finishing and Corner
Finishing
Holemaking
Trajectory Milling
Editing NC Steps
Tool Configuration
Manufacturing Parameters
Reference Geometry
Review Toolpath
Compute Step Time

Figure 3 Face Milling Configuration


Tools

Fo

Other Milling Steps


Insert
Configure using menu
manager

Creating New Items in the Process Manager


Inserting Items In the process view, you can insert and configure
operations and fixtures. In the resources view, you can insert and configure
workcells.
Inserting NC Steps In the process view, you can insert and configure
many different types of NC steps, including:
Facing and Profiling You can create and configure facing and profiling
steps.
Roughing and Re-roughing You can create and configure roughing
and re-roughing steps.
2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 11

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Finishing and Corner Finishing You can create and configure finishing
and corner finishing steps.
Holemaking You can create and configure any type of holemaking
step, including standard drilling, center drilling, and countersink drilling.
Trajectory milling You can create and configure 3-axis trajectory milling
steps and 2-axis curve trajectory milling steps.
Editing Steps You can directly configure all of the previously mentioned
steps directly within the process table.
Tools enable you to specify cutting tools, edit manufacturing parameters,
and specify step reference geometry such as holes to drill or surfaces
to machine.
You can also review the resulting toolpath and compute step time.
Other Milling Steps You can also insert other milling steps in the process
table including volume milling and surface milling.
However, you cannot directly configure these steps within the process
table. Editing of these steps invokes the menu manager, enabling you to
complete the step configuration using normal menu manager selections.

Module 22 | Page 12

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating New Items in the Process


Manager
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Process_New-Items
Task 1:

NEW_ITEMS.ASM

Create a new face milling step in the process manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

O
se
U

rn

al

from
Process Manager
the Process Group.
Notice that a fixture and an
operation step have been
created, as shown.
Notice that a workcell and
tooling have also been
configured.

nl

2. Open the process table.


In the ribbon, select the
Manufacturing tab. Click

In

te

3. In the Manufacturing Process


Table dialog box, select the
operation row, as shown.

Fo

rP
TC

4. In the process table, click Insert


> Step > Milling Step.
Notice that the Create Milling
Step dialog box is configured,
as shown.
Click OK to create a face
milling step.
In the Milling: Face Milling
dashboard, select Complete
Feature .
5. Edit the face milling step.
Click Edit
.
Notice that the configuration
tools appear in the Milling:
Face Milling dashboard.
Notice also that the status
column indicates the current
status of the mill step.

2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 13

6. Configure the tool.


In the Milling: Face Milling dashboard, click Tool Manager .
Ensure that the 30_0_FEM tool is selected, and then right-click and
select Select tool and return.
7. Edit the manufacturing parameters.
In the Milling: Face Milling dashboard, select the Parameters tab.

nl
O
se
U

8. Edit the required parameters.


Edit CUT_FEED to 100.
Edit STEP_DEPTH to 5.
Edit STEP_OVER to 25.
Edit CLEAR_DIST to 2.
Edit SPINDLE_SPEED to 1000.
Click OK.

In the Parameters tab, click Step Parameters

rn

al

Notice that the status column in the process table indicates missing
surfaces.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

9. Configure the surface for


machining.
In the Milling: Face Milling
dashboard, select the
References tab.
Ensure that in the Type
drop-down menu, Surface is
selected.
In the Graphics window,
right-click and select
Machining References.
Select the top surface of the
reference model, as shown.
In the Milling: Face Milling
dashboard, click Complete
Feature .

Module 22 | Page 14

2011 PTC

10. Review the operation toolpath.


In the Manufacturing Process,

nl
O
se
U

te

rn

al

11. Apply changes to the


manufacturing model.
Click Close in the
Manufacturing Process Table
dialog box.
Notice that a face milling
sequence is added to the
model tree listing, as shown.

click Show Toolpath


.
To slow down the toolpath
simulation, drag the display
speed slider to the left.
Click Play .
Notice that the selected
surface is machined, as
shown.
Click Close when finished.

Fo

rP
TC

In

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 15

Creating and Using Manufacturing Templates


In the process manager, you can configure manufacturing
templates based on existing steps, and then use these templates
to create manufacturing steps in different models.
Manufacturing Templates

Using Manufacturing Templates

Figure 1 Creating an NC Step


Template

al

se

Insert new NC steps.


Step information taken
from template.
Configure missing items.
Insert workcell templates.

nl

Based on existing NC steps.


Use in different
manufacturing models.
Workcell templates.
Stored as XML files.

te

Manufacturing Templates

rn

Figure 2 Configuring Missing Items

Fo

rP
TC

In

You can configure manufacturing templates based on existing steps, and


then use these templates to create manufacturing steps in different models.
Similarly, you can create workcell templates based on existing workcells,
and then use these templates to create workcells in different models.
Manufacturing templates are stored as XML files and contain information
about NC steps or workcells.

Using Manufacturing Templates


You can use manufacturing templates to insert new NC steps into the
process table. The step names, tools, and parameters are derived from
the template.
You need to select geometry references, although existing operation
coordinate systems and retract planes are used by default. You can
configure missing elements after the step has been inserted.
In the resources view, you can use workcell templates to insert new
workcells. The workcell names, tools, and parameters are derived from
the template.

Module 22 | Page 16

2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using Manufacturing


Templates
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Templates
Task 1:

TEMPLATE.ASM

Create an NC step manufacturing template.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

O
se
U

rn

3. Select the operation row.

al

from
Process Manager
the Process Group.
Notice that a standard drilling
step has been created, as
shown.
Note the first NC step creates
a center drilling toolpath.

nl

2. Open the process table.


In the ribbon, select the
Manufacturing tab. Click

rP
TC

In

te

.
Click Show Toolpath
Click Play .
Notice the center drilling
toolpath, as shown.
Click Close when finished.

4. Create the NC step template.


Select the CDRILL_20 step.

Fo

.
Click Create Template
Accept the default name of cdrill_20.xml in the Template Name
text box.
Click OK to create the template.
Click Close in the Manufacturing Process Table dialog box.
Click Close Window

5. Open a test manufacturing model.


.
Click Open
Select TEST.ASM, and click Open.

2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 17

6. Open the process table.


Click Process Manager
from the Process Group.
Notice that no toolpaths have been created.
Select the operation row.

nl

7. Insert a template step.


Click Insert > Step > From
Template.
Select CDRILL_20.XML, and
click Open.
Notice that a step is inserted in
the process table, as shown.

Click Edit

se

8. Edit the center drilling step.


Select the CDRILL_20 row.

al

9. Configure the holes for


machining.

rP
TC

In

te

rn

Click Hole Sets


.
With Holeset 1 selected, in the
References area, right-click
and select Add.
Press CTRL and select the
eight holes in the model, as
shown.
Click OK.

Fo

10. Configure the hole depth.


In the hole depth area,
double-click the Value text
box, as shown.
Then select the top surface of
the model.
Click OK.

Module 22 | Page 18

2011 PTC

11. Review the toolpath.

nl

Click Show Toolpath


.
Click the CL Data bar to make
the CL data visible.
Click Play .
Notice that all eight holes are
center drilled, as shown.
Note, your holes may be drilled
in a different order.
Click Close when finished.

se

12. Apply changes to the manufacturing model.


Click Apply Changes .
Click Close in the Manufacturing Process Table dialog box.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

This completes the procedure.

2011 PTC

Module 22 | Page 19

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
rP
TC
Fo
Module 22 | Page 20

2011 PTC

23
y

Module

nl

Creating and Post-Processing CL Data Files

se

Module Overview

rn

al

Post-processing is the final stage in the manufacturing process. When


toolpaths have been completed, you can create ASCII format cutter location
(CL) data files for operations or selected NC sequences. You can then
post-process CL data files into specific machine control data (MCD) files
using a post-processor. It is important to understand that changing NC
sequences requires you to recreate the CL data file for the operation and
post-process this file again to produce an updated MCD file.

rP
TC

Objectives

In

te

In this module, you learn about the post-processing method. You create CL
Data files for operations and selected NC sequence sets. You also create
MCD files using a post-processor.

Fo

After completing this module, you will be able to:


Describe the post-processing method.
Create CL Data files for operations and selected NC sequence sets.
Create MCD files using a post-processor.

2011 PTC

Module 23 | Page 1

Creating and Post-Processing CL Data Files


When toolpaths have been completed, you can use them to
create ASCII format Cutter Location (CL) data files. You can then
post-process CL data files into specific machine control data
(MCD) files using a post-processor.
Post-Processing Theory

nl

CL data files generated from


toolpaths.
Post-process CL data files into
machine-specific code.
Machine-specific code used to
control machine tools.

Figure 1 CL Data File Simulation

U
rn

al

Figure 2 CL Data File

In

te

Complete NC Sequences
Create CL Data Files
From one or more NC
sequences.
ASCII format.
Filename.ncl.
Post-Process CL Data Files
Create MCD files.
Filename.tap.

se

Post-Processing Method

rP
TC

Changes to NC Sequences

Recreate CL data files and MCD


files.

Figure 3 MCD File

Fo

Post-Processing Theory
Cutter Location (CL) data files are generated from the toolpaths specified
within NC sequences.
These CL data files can then be processed by machine-specific or generic
post-processors for NC tape generation or DNC communications.
You can then use the post-processed files to control machine tools such
as a 3-axis milling machine.

Post-Processing Method
The following steps describe the method of post-processing data to control
machine tools.
Complete NC Sequences You first need to complete the operation by
creating all necessary NC sequences.

Module 23 | Page 2

2011 PTC

Create CL Data Files When the operation is complete, you can create
CL data files.
You can create CL data files of one or more selected NC sequences, or
a whole operation.
The files are ASCII format files.
The default filename format is filename.ncl.
Post-Process CL Data Files You can then post-process CL data files into
specific machine control data (MCD) files.
You have the option of creating the CL and MCD files simultaneously.
The default filename format is filename.tap.

nl

Note, any subsequent changes made to NC sequences means you must


recreate the CL data files and MCD files.

Configuration Options

se

A number of configuration options control the post-processing method.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

Each Pro/NC module includes a standard set of NC post-processors that


you can use directly or modify using an optional module.
ncpost_type You can control which post-processing module to use by
setting the configuration option ncpost_type. The values are:
gpost (default) Use the G-Post post-processors provided by Intercim
Corporation.
ncpost Use the NC manufacturing post-processors.
You can also use other post-processors capable of reading APT
(automatically programmed tools).
gpostpp-_dir Specifies the directory for gpost post-processors.
pro_mf_cl_dir Specifies the location to store CL data files.

2011 PTC

Module 23 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating and Post-Processing CL Data


Files
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Milling\Post_Process
Task 1:

POST.ASM

Create a CL data file and MCD file for operation op010.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl

2. Load a configuration file to specify the location of the post-processor.


Click File > Options.
Click the Configuration Editor and select Import configuration
file from the Import/Export drop-down menu.

se

.
Click Working Directory
Select CONFIG.PRO and click Open.
Click OK.
Click No in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.

al

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

3. Display a CL data file.


In the model tree, select
operation OP010.
Right-click and select Play
Path.
If necessary, click the CL
data bar to make the CL data
visible.
Click Play .
Observe the toolpath and
corresponding CL data file, as
shown.

Module 23 | Page 4

2011 PTC

4. Create a CL data file for the operation.


In the Play Path dialog box, click File > Save As MCD.
Select the Save CL File Also check box.
Select the Verbose and Trace check boxes.
Click Output.
Click OK to create a CL data file named op010.ncl.

se

nl

5. Create an MCD file for the operation.


From the menu manager, click UNCX01.P99 to select the
post-processor.
When prompted, type 1001 for the program number, and press
ENTER.
Click Close in the information window.
Click Close in the Play Path dialog box.

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

Click the Web Browser


from the Status toolbar, and in
the browser window right-click
and select Refresh.
Notice that the listing for the
working directory contains
op010.ncl, and op010.tap, as
shown.
to close the
Click Close
browser.

6. View the contents of the browser.

Fo

You have created a CL data file named op010.ncl and an MCD file
named op010.tap.

2011 PTC

Module 23 | Page 5

Task 2:

Create a CL data file and MCD file for the drilling sequences only.

nl

1. Create a CL data file for a set of sequences.


Select Save CL Files for a Set from the Save a CL File Type
drop-down menu and select Create.
Type Drill_Only for the name, and press ENTER.
Select the CSINK_HOLES and 10_0_HOLES check boxes.
Click Done Sel.
Click Drill_Only.
Click File.
Select the MCD File check box, and click Done.
Click OK to create a CL data file named drill_only.ncl.

rn

al

se

2. Create an MCD file for a set of sequences.


Click Done.
Click UNCX01.P99 to select the post-processor.
When prompted, type 1002 for the program number, and press
ENTER.
Click Close in the information window.
Click Done Output.

te

3. View the contents of the browser.

Fo

rP
TC

In

Click the Web Browser


from the Status toolbar, and in
the browser window right-click
and select Refresh.
Notice that the listing for the
working directory contains
drill_only.ncl and drill_only.tap,
as shown.
Click Close
to close the
browser.

You have now created a CL data file named drill_only.ncl and an


MCD file named drill_only.tap.

This completes the procedure.

Module 23 | Page 6

2011 PTC

Copyright
Milling using Creo Parametric

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Copyright 2011 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.


User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its
subsidiary companies (collectively PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and
other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use
of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in
printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use
and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any
copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC.
Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation
may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or
transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no
authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without
notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains
valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the
United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium,
disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL
DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is,
and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and
we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including
public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and
scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This
data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized
distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection
and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and
contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.
For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information:
For Windchill products, select About Windchill at the bottom of the product page. For InterComm
products, on the Help main page, click the link for Copyright 20xx. For other products, click Help >
About on the main menu of the product.
Registered Trademarks of PTC
Advanced Surface Design, Advent, Arbortext, Behavioral Modeling, CADDS, Calculation
Management Suite, CoCreate, Computervision, CounterPart, Create Collaborate Control, Designate,
EPD, EPD.Connect, Epic Editor, Expert Machinist, GRANITE, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine,
InPart, InterComm, IsoCompose, IsoDraw, IsoView, ITEDO, Mathcad, Mathsoft, MECHANICA,
NetRegulus, NetRM, the NetRegulus logo, Optegra, OneSpace, Parametric Technology, Parametric
Technology Corporation, PartSpeak, PHOTORENDER, ProductPoint, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/E,
Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, Product First,
Product Development Means Business, Product Makes the Company, PTC, the PTC logo,
PT/Products, Shaping Innovation, Simple Powerful Connected, StudyWorks, The Product
Development Company, The Way to Product First, Wildfire, Windchill, Windchill DynamicDesignLink,
Windchill MPMLink, Windchill PartsLink, Windchill PDMLink..
Trademarks of PTC
3B2, 3DPAINT, Arbortext Editor, Arbortext Content Manager, Arbortext Contributor, Arbortext
Companion for Word, Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher, Arbortext Publishing Engine, Arbortext
Dynamic Link Manager, Arbortext Styler, Arbortext Architect, Arbortext Digital Media Publisher,
Arbortext CSDB for S1000D, Arbortext IETP Viewer for S1000D, Arbortext Reviewer for
S1000D, Arbortext Authoring Interface for S1000D, Arbortext Editor for S1000D, Arbortext
Publisher for S1000D, Arbortext Provisioning Manager, Arbortext Provisioning Reviewer, Arbortext
Provisioning Transaction Manager, Arbortext Parts Catalog Manager for S1000D, Arbortext
Learning Content Manager for S1000D, Arbortext Learning Management System, Arbortext
Reviewer for EAGLE, Arbortext LSA Interface, Associative Topology Bus, AutobuildZ, Auto
Round, CDRS, CoCreate Modeling, CoCreate Drafting, CoCreate Model Manager, CoCreate
Drawing Manager, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker,
Create Collaborate Control Communicate, ECAD Compare, EDAcompare, EDAconduit,
DataDoctor, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, Distributed Services Manager, DIVISION, e/ENGINEER,
eNC Explorer, Expert Framework, Expert MoldBase, Expert Toolmaker, FlexPDM, FlexPLM,
Harmony, Import Data Doctor, InSight, InterComm Expert, InterComm EDAcompare, InterComm

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

EDAconduit, collective creativity, ISSM, KDiP, Knowledge Discipline in Practice, Knowledge System
Driver, ModelCHECK, MoldShop, NC Builder, PDS Workbench, POLYCAPP, Pro/ANIMATE,
Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COLLABORATE,
Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONCEPT, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER,
Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE,
Pro/FEM POST, Pro/FICIENCY, Pro/FLY THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS, Pro/INTERFACE,
Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/Manikin, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View,
Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC ADVANCED, Pro/NC CHECK, Pro/NC MILL, Pro/NC POST, Pro/NC
SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC TURN, Pro/NC WEDM, Pro/NC Wire EDM, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR,
Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR,
Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN TOOLS,
Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/TABLE, Pro/TOOLMAKER, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link,
Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, ProductView, ProductView ECAD Compare, ProductView
Validate, PTC Precision, PTC DesignQuest, PTC Channel Advantage, Realized Value Platform,
Routed Systems Designer, Shrinkwrap, Validation Manager, Warp, Windchill ProjectLink, Windchill
SupplyLink, Windchill RequirementsLink, and Windchill Supplier Management..
Patents of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary
Registration numbers and issue dates follow. Additionally, equivalent patents may be issued or
pending outside of the United States. Contact PTC for further information. 5,771,392/23-June-1998;
(EP)0240557/02-October-1986;
5,423,023/05-June-1990;
4,956,771/11-September-1990;
5,058,000/15-October-1991; 5,140,321/18-August-1992; 5,297,053/22-March-1994; 5,428,772/
27-June-1995; 5,469,538/21-Nov-1995; 5,469,538/21-November-1995; 5,506,950/09-April-1996;
4,310,614/30-April-1996; 5,513,316/30-April-1996; 5,526,475/11-June-1996; 5,561,747/01-October1996; 5,526,475/6-November-1996; 5,557,176/09-November-1996; 5,680,523/21-October-1997;
5,689,711/18-November-1997;
5,771,392/23-June-1998;
5,838,331/17-November-1998;
5,844,555/01-Dec-1998; 5,844,555/1-December-1998; 5,850,535/15-December-1998; 4,310,615/
21-December-1998; 4,310,614/22-April-1999; 6,275,866/14-Aug-2001; 6,275,866/14-August-2001;
6,308,144/23-October-2001; 6,447,223B1/10-Sept-2002; 6,473,673B1/29-October-2002; PCT
03/05061/13-Feb-2003; 6,545,671B1/08-April-2003; GB2354683B/04-June-2003; GB2354683B/04June-2003; 6,580,428B1/17-June-2003; GB2354685B/18-June-2003; GB2354684B/02-July-2003;
6,608,623B1/19-August-2003; 6,608,623B1/19-August-2003; 6,625,607B1/23-September-2003;
GB2354924/24-September-2003; GB2384125/15-October-2003; GB2354686/15-October-2003;
GB2353376/05-November-2003; GB2354096/12-November-2003; GB2353115/10-December2003; 6,665,569B1/16-December-2003; (KO)415475/6-January-2004; GB2388003B/21-January2004; GB2365567/10-March-2004; EU0812447/26-May-2004; GB2363208/25-August-2004;
GB2366639B/13-October-2004;
7,006,956/28-February-2006;
7,013,246B1/14-March-2006;
7,013,468/14-March-2006; (JP)3,962,109/25-May-2007; 7,464,007B2/09-December-2008.
Third-Party Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator, Distiller, FrameMaker and the Acrobat logo are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. ANSYS is a registered trademark of ANSYS Inc. I
Run and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of Alias Ltd. TeX is a trademark of the American
Mathematical Society. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, Panther, and Tiger are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor, and RealDWG are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. BEA
WebLogic Server and BEA WebLogic Platform are trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. CATIA and
CADAM are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes, S.A. The Sigma Check icon, CETOL,
CETOL 6 Sigma are trademarks of Sigmetrix, LLC. MEDUSA and STHENO are trademarks of
CAD Schroer GmbH. Allegro, Cadence, and Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence
Design Systems, Inc. Cognos is a registered trademark of Cognos Corporation. CYA, iArchive,
HOTbackup, and Virtual StandBy are trademarks or registered trademarks of CYA Technologies,
Inc. DataDirect Connect is a registered trademark of DataDirect Technologies. Documentum
is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor
Company. JAWS is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific BLV Group, LLC in the United
States and other countries. Geomagic is a registered trademark of Geomagic, Inc. 2D DCM,
3D DCM, CDM and AEM are trademarks of D-Cubed Ltd. HP, Hewlett-Packard, and HP-UX are
registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM, DB2, DOORS, AIX, and WebSphere
are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Advanced ClusterProven, ClusterProven, the
ClusterProven design, Rational Rose, and Rational ClearCase are trademarks or registered
trademarks of International Business Machines in the United States and other countries and are
used under license. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of
this software product. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. OrbixWeb is a registered
trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. Feature-Following Anti-Aliasing is a trademark of LightWork
Design. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. 3Dconnexion is a registered trademark of
Logitech International S.A. MSC.NASTRAN is a registered trademark of MSC Software Corporation.
MainWin and Mainsoft are trademarks of Mainsoft Corporation. MatrixOne is a trademark of
MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphics and Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design,
AMPLE, and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation. Helix is a trademark
of Microcadam, Inc. Microsoft, ActiveX, Excel, JScript, Vista, Windows, the Windows logo, Visual

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Basic, the Visual Basic logo, SharePoint, and Active Accessibility are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Moldflow is a
registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the
Mozilla Foundation. FLEXnet, FLEXnet Publisher, InstallShield, and InstallAnywhere are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Acresso Software Inc. Netscape, Netscape Navigator, Netscape
Communicator, and the Netscape N and Ship's Wheel logos are registered trademarks or service
marks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. OSF/Motif and
Motif are trademarks of the Open Software Foundation, Inc. Oracle and interMedia are registered
trademarks of Oracle Corporation. Palm Computing, Palm OS, Graffiti, HotSync, and Palm Modem
are registered trademarks, and Palm III, Palm IIIe, Palm IIIx, Palm V, Palm Vx, Palm VII, Palm,
More connected, Simply Palm, the Palm Computing platform logo, all Palm logos, and HotSync
logo are trademarks of Palm, Inc. or its subsidiaries. PANTONE is a registered trademark and
PANTONE CALIBRATED is a trademark of Pantone, Inc. Proximity and Linguibase are registered
trademarks of Proximity Technology, Inc. Elan License Manager and Softlock are trademarks of
Rainbow Technologies, Inc. RAND is a trademark of RAND Worldwide. RosettaNet is a trademark
and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet, a nonprofit
organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. IRIX is a registered
trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. S1000D (R) is a registered trademark of ASD. SolidWorks
and eDrawings are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolidWorks Corporation. SPARC is a
registered trademark and SPARCStation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc. (Products
bearing the SPARC trademarks are based on an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems,
Inc.) All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of
SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the
Sun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java based marks, and "The Network is the Computer"
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in
other countries. Symbolics, CLOE Runtime, and Minima are trademarks, and CLOE, Genera, and
Zetalisp are registered trademarks of Symbolics, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open
Group. TIBCO is a registered trademark and TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO
Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are trademarks or
registered trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in the United States and other countries. I-DEAS,
Metaphase, Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, TeamCenter, UG NX, and Unigraphics are trademarks
or registered trademarks of UGS Corp., a Siemens group company. Galaxy Application Environment
is a licensed trademark of Visix Software, Inc. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications,
Inc. API Tookit is a trademark of InterCAP Graphics Systems, Inc. BEA and WebLogic are registered
trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. X Window System is a trademark of X Consortium, Inc.
VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech. Product may contain
RealDWG technology by Autodesk, Inc., Copyright 1998-2006 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved
(www.autodesk.com/autodeskrealdwg). File Filters 1986-2002 Circle Systems, Inc. Certain
business intelligence reporting functionality is powered by Cognos. DFORMD.DLL is copyrighted
software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be distributed. Pro/TOOLMAKER
contains licensed third-party technology: 5AXMSURF is copyrighted software of ModuleWorks
GmbH. Certain 3D Read CAD data exchange tools are copyrighted software of Datakit SRL.
Hyphenologist Copyright 1986-1999, Computer Hyphenation Ltd. All rights reserved. RetrievalWare
is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation. DataDirect Connect is copyrighted software of
DataDirect Technologies. PStill and PSRaster software is copyright Dipl.- Ing. Frank Siegert,
1996 to present. FAST InStream is copyright of Fast Search & Transfer, Inc. Portions of the
Mathcad Solver 1990-2002 by Frontline Systems, Inc. Exceed and Exceed 3D are copyrighted
software of Hummingbird Ltd., a division of Open Text Corporation. Rational Rose and Rational
ClearCase are copyrighted software of IBM Corp. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not
responsible for the operation of this software product. G POST is copyrighted software and a
registered trademark of Austin NC. Xdriver and 3dxsrv are copyrighted software of 3Dconnexion,
Inc, a Logitech International S.A. company. Larson CGM Engine 9.4, Copyright 1992-2006 Larson
Software Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork
Design 19902001. MainWin Dedicated Libraries are copyrighted software of Mainsoft Corporation.
Microsoft Jet, Microsoft XML, Technology "Powered by Groove", Microsoft SQL Server 2005, Visual
Basic for Applications, Internet Explorer and Portions compiled from Microsoft Developer Network
Redistributable Sample Code, including Microsoft DLL redistributables, are all copyrighted software
of Microsoft Corporation. Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology. Fatigue
Advisor nCode libraries from nCode International. NuTCRACKER Server Operating Environment is
copyrighted software of MKS Inc.
Oracle 8i run time, Oracle 9i run time, and Oracle 10g run time are Copyright 20022004
Oracle Corporation. Oracle programs provided herein are subject to a restricted use license
and can only be used in conjunction with the PTC software they are provided with. PDFlib
software is copyright 1997-2005 PDFlib GmbH. All rights reserved. Proximity Linguistic
Technology provides Spelling Check/Thesaurus portions of certain software products, including:
The Proximity/Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag Database. Copyright 1997 Bertelsmann Lexikon
Verlag. Copyright 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/C.A.
Strombertg AB Database. Copyright 1989 C.A. Strombertg AB. Copyright 1989, All Rights

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Editions Fernand Nathan Database. Copyright
1984 Editions Fernand Nathan. Copyright 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology,
Inc.; The Proximity/Espasa-Calpe Database. Copyright 1990 Espasa-Calpe. Copyright
1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre
i Maura Database. Copyright 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura Copyright 1991, All
Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc.
Database. Copyright 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright 1994, All Rights
Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Hachette Database. Copyright 1992
Hachette. Copyright 1992, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/IDE
a.s. Database. Copyright 1989, 1990 IDE a.s. Copyright 1989, 1990, All Rights Reserved,
Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc. Database. Copyright 1984, 1990
Merriam-Webster, Inc. Copyright 1984, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.;
The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc./Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Database. Copyright
1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. Copyright 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright 1994,
All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Munksgaard International Publishers
Ltd. Database. Copyright 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. Copyright 1990, All
Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/S. Fischer Verlag Database. Copyright
1983 S. Fischer Verlag. Copyright 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The
Proximity/Van Dale Lexicografie by Database. Copyright 1995, 1997 Van Dale Lexicografie by.
Copyright 1996, 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/William
Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. Database. Copyright 1984, 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd.
Copyright 1988, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Zanichelli
Database. Copyright 1989 Zanichelli. Copyright 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity
Technology, Inc. Certain license management is based on Elan License Manager 1989-1999
Rainbow Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. PDEFIT 1995-2002 Dr. Klaus Schittkowski.
MuPAD OEM kernel, version 3.2.1 (Mathsoft Kernel) 2005 by SciFace Software GmbH & Co.
KG. TetMesh GHS3D provided by Simulog Technologies, a business unit of Simulog S.A. HOOPS
graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America,
Inc. TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of Technomatix
Technologies Ltd. TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service,
TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are provided by TIBCO Software Inc. Parasolid
is copyrighted software of UGS Corp, a Siemens group company. VisTools library is copyrighted
software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging
to VKI Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebEx Communications, Inc. Certain
graphics-handling portions are based on the following technologies: GIF: Copyright 1989, 1990 Kirk
L. Johnson. The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this software, including all implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any special,
indirect, or consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence, or other tortious action, arising out of or in
connection with the use or performance of this software. JPEG: This software is based in part on
the work of the Independent JPEG Group. PNG: Copyright 2004-2006 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.
TIFF: Copyright 1988-1997 Sam Leffler, Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
software is provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind, express, implied, or otherwise,
including without limitation, any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In
no event shall Sam Leffler or Silicon Graphics be liable for any special, incidental, indirect, or
consequential damages of any kind, or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether or not advised of the possibility of damage, or on any theory of liability, arising
out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. XBM, Sun Raster, and Sun
Icon: Copyright, 1987, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine
copyright 1994-2003 Wintertree Software, Inc. Portions of software documentation are used
with the permission of the World Wide Web Consortium. Copyright 19942006 World Wide Web
Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, European Research Consortium for Informatics
and Mathematics, Keio University). All Rights Reserved. http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal.
Such portions are indicated at their points of use. Copyright and ownership of certain software
components is with YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED, unauthorized use and copying of
which is hereby prohibited. YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED 1987. (Lic. #YSS:SC:9107001)
KCL (Kyoto Common Lisp) (C) Taiichi Yuasa and Masami Hagiya, 1984. 2D DCM, 3D DCM, CDM,
AEM Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 2006. BCGControlBar library (C) BCGSoft. Portions of this software
copyright Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2004-2005. PDFNet SDK is copyright
PDFTron Systems Inc., 2001-2006, and distributed by CoCreate Software GmbH under license.
All rights reserved. FE Analysis: Portions of this software copyright The MacNeal-Schwendler
Corporation 1996-2006. GOelan V4 is a registered trademark of CN Industries. Portions of
this software copyright LightWork Design Limited 1990 - 2005, 2006. Cabling copyright MIP
Ltd http://www.mip-group.com.
PartLibrary copyright TECHSOFT Datenverarbeitung GmbH
(http://www.techsoft.at).
LAPACK libraries used are freely available at http://www.netlib.org (authors are Anderson, E.
and Bai, Z. and Bischof, C. and Blackford, S. and Demmel, J. and Dongarra, J. and Du Croz, J.
and Greenbaum, A. and Hammarling, S. and McKenney, A. and Sorensen, D.). Certain software

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

components licensed in connection with the Apache Software Foundation and/or pursuant to the
Apache Software License Agreement (version 2.0 or earlier) or similar style license. All rights
are reserved by the Licensor of such works, and use is subject to the terms and limitations
(and license agreement) at http://www.apache.org. This software is provided by its Contributors
AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, and any expressed or
implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of title non-infringement,
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the Apache
Software Foundation or its Contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special,
exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute
goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on
any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise)
arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Software includes: Apache Server, Axis, Ant, Tomcat, Xalan, Xerces, Batik, Jakarta, Apache POI,
Jakarta Regular Expression, Commons-FileUpload, Solr, Tika, and XMLBeans IBM XML Parser
for Java Edition, the IBM SaxParser and the IBM Lotus XSL Edition DITA-OT - Apache License
Version IzPack: Java-based Software Installers Generator (http://www.izforge.com/izpack/start)
JakartaORO NekoHTML and CyberNeko Pull Parser software developed by Andy Clark
Copyright Andy Clark.
All rights reserved.
Lucene (http://lucene.apache.org) Quartz
(scheduler) Copyright 2004-20xx OpenSymphony (http://www.opensymphony.com/quartz/)
Jetty Copyright Mortbay.Org (http://www.mortbay.com/mbindex.html) Google Web Toolkit,
Google Web Toolkit (GWT) Incubator, and GWTx; Copyright Google U3D Library Copyright
1999 - 2006 Intel Corporation MyFaces (http://myfaces.apache.org/index.html) JDBCAppender
(http://www.dankomannhaupt.de/projects/index.html) EHcache Copyright 2003-2007 Luck
Consulting Pty Ltd (http://ehcache.sourceforge.net/) cglib Copyright 2002-2004 (http://cglib.
sourceforge.net/) LOG4PLSQL Copyright 2002 The LOG4PLSQL project team. All rights reserved
(http://log4plsql.sourceforge.net) Log4cxx (http://logging.apache.org/log4cxx/index.html) SPRING See www.springframework.org. HttpComponents project software (http://hc.apache.org/) Commons
Codec (http://commons.apache.org/codec/) Apache Log4net (http://logging.apache.org/log4net/)
Beans Scripting Framework (BSF) Copyright 2002-2006 The Apache Software Foundation includes software developed at The Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/) WebFX
Coolbar 2 (http://webfx.eae.net) WebFX Cross Browser tree Widget 1.17 (http://webfx.eae.net)
PCRE 7.2 (http://www.pcre.org/) JDOM Copyright 2000-2004 Jason Hunter & Brett McLaughlin.
All rights reserved. This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on
behalf of the JDOM Project (http://www.jdom.org/) The Ajax Control Toolkit (including compiled,
object code and source code versions) are licensed only pursuant to the Microsoft Public License
(Ms-PL) which can be found at http://www.codeplex.com/AjaxControlToolkit. Microsoft Ajax
Library provided pursuant to the Microsoft Software Supplemental License Terms for Microsoft
ASP.NET 2.0 AJAX Extensions. The Boost Library - Misc. C++ software from http://www.boost.org;
Provided pursuant to: Boost Software License http://www.boost.org/more/license_info.html and
http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt. AspectJ (http://www.eclipse.org/aspectj/) and Eclipse SWT
(http://www.eclipse.org/swt/); Copyright 20xx The Eclipse Foundation are distributed under the
Eclipse Public License (EPL) (http://www.eclipse.org/org/documents/epl-v10.php) and is provided
AS IS by authors with no warranty therefrom and any provisions which differ from the EPL are
offered by PTC. Upon request, PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge
no more than the cost of performing this distribution. Command Line Argument Parser. Author
peterhal@microsoft.com is licensed pursuant to the Shared Source License for Command Line
Parser Library and is provided by the author "as is" with no warranties (none whatsoever). This
means no express, implied, or statutory warranty, including without limitation, warranties of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, or any warranty of title or noninfringement. No
contributor to the Software will be liable for any of those types of damages known as indirect,
special, consequential, or incidental related to the Software to the maximum extent the law permits,
no matter what legal theory its based on. The following software is incorporated pursuant to the
"BSD License" (Berkeley Software Distribution) or a similar style license: iCal4j is Copyright
2005, Ben Fortuna, All rights reserved. Dojo Copyright 2005, The Dojo Foundation, All rights
reserved. Jaxen (shipped as part of dom4j) Copyright 2003-2006 The Werken Company. All
Rights Reserved. XMP (eXtensible Metadata Platform) technology from Adobe - Copyright
1999 - 2007, Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Groovy Copyright 2003 James
Strachan and Bob McWhirter. All Rights Reserved. Firebug Copyright 2007, Parakey Inc. JMSN
(http://sourceforge.net/projects/jmsn/) Thumb Plug TGA Copyright 1991-2003 Echidna, Inc. All
rights reserved. ASM Copyright 2000-2005 INRIA, France Telecom. All rights reserved. PDFBox
Copyright 2002-2007, www.pdfbox.org. All rights reserved. BerkeleyDB (as used with OpenDS);
Copyright 1990-20xx Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved.
MiGLayout - The Java Layout Manager for Swing & SWT; Copyright 2004, Mikael Grev, MiG
InfoCom AB. (miglayout@Miginfocom.com). All rights reserved. PCRE - Perl Compatible Regular
Expressions Basic Library Functions written by: Philip Hazel, Email local part: ph10, Email
domain: cam.ac.uk, University of Cambridge Computing Service, Cambridge, England. Copyright
1997-2008 University of Cambridge. All rights reserved. SIMILE Copyright The SIMILE Project
2006. All rights reserved. Note that JQuery: Copyright 2008 John Resig (www.jquery.com) is

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

included in the Ajax section of this distribution and is covered under the MIT LICENSE (see below).
Launch4j (http://launch4j.sourceforge.net/). The head subproject (the code which is attached to the
wrapped jars) is licensed under the MIT license. Launch4j may be used for wrapping closed source,
commercial applications. JempBox Java XMP Library: Copyright 2006-2007, www.jempbox.org.
All rights reserved. FontBox - Copyright 2003-2005, www.fontbox.org. All rights reserved. ANTLR
Copyright 2003-2008, Terence Parr. All rights reserved. Provided pursuant to ANTLR 3 License.
(http://www.antlr.org/license.html) NativeCall Java Toolkit (http://sourceforge.net/projects/nativecall/)
Redistribution and use of the above in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
is permitted provided that the following conditions are met: (i) Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer; (ii)
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution;
and (iii) Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of any other contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission. THE ABOVE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The Java Getopt.jar file, copyright 1987
1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #ZipLib GNU software is developed for the Free Software
Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA, copyright 1989, 1991.
PTC hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program #ZipLib written by Mike Krueger. #ZipLib
licensed free of charge and there is no warranty for the program, to the extent permitted by applicable
law. Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or other parties provide the
program AS IS without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited
to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The entire risk as
to the quality and performance of the program is with you. Should the program prove defective,
you assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. The following software is
incorporated pursuant to the "MIT License" (or a similar license): SLF4J source code and binaries
Copyright 2004-20xx QOS.ch. All rights reserved. Script.aculo.us (built on "prototype.conio.net").
Copyright 2005 Thomas Fuchs (http://script.aculo.us, http://mir.aculo.us). ICU4J software Copyright
1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All rights reserved. Except as
contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder. json library: Copyright 2002 JSON.org. XPM Copyright 1989-95 GROUPE
BULL. DynamicToolbar FCKEditor plugin, v1.1 (080810); Copyright 2008, Gonzalo Perez de la
Ossa (http://dense13.com/). JQuery Copyright 2008 John Resig (www.jquery.com) NATIVECALL
(C) 20022008 Johann Burkard. All rights reserved. (http://johannburkard.de/software/nativecall/)
The above software is used and redistributed under the following permissions: Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. The Java Telnet Applet
(StatusPeer.java, TelnetIO.java, TelnetWrapper.java, TimedOutException.java), Copyright 1996,
97 Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meiner, is redistributed under the GNU General Public License. This
license is from the original copyright holder and the Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND. You may obtain a copy of the source code for the Applet at http://www.mud.de/se/jta (for
a charge of no more than the cost of physically performing the source distribution), by sending e mail
to leo@mud.de or marcus@mud.deyou are allowed to choose either distribution method. Said
source code is likewise provided under the GNU General Public License. The following software,
which may be called by certain PTC software products, is licensed under the GNU General Public
License (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.txt) and if used by the customer is provided AS IS by the
authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU GPL for more details). Upon request

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more than the cost of performing
this distribution: The PJA (Pure Java AWT) Toolkit library (http://www.eteks.com/pja/en). The
following unmodified libraries are likewise distributed under the GNU-GPL: libstdc and #ziplib (each
are provided pursuant to an exception that permits use of the library in proprietary applications
with no restrictions provided that the library is not modified). The following products are licensed
with the Classpath exception (Linking this library statically or dynamically with other modules is
making a combined work based on this library. Thus, the terms and conditions of the GNU General
Public License cover the whole combination. As a special exception, the copyright holders of this
library give you permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable,
regardless of the license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the
resulting executable under terms of your choice, provided that you also meet, for each linked
independent module, the terms and conditions of the license of that module. An independent module
is a module which is not derived from or based on this library.): javax.media.j3d package; Copyright
1996-2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA. All rights
reserved. The source code is licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2. This project
contains the following third-party source code that is provided under separate licensing terms (These
terms are found in the THIRDPARTY-LICENSE-*.txt files in the top-level directory of this project.
See the README-FIRST.txt for more information.). 3D Graphics API for the Java Platform 1.6.0
Pre-Release licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2, with the Classpath Exception. #ziplib
(SharpZipLib, formerly NZipLib), a Zip, GZip, Tar and BZip2 library, Copyright 2000-20xx IC#Code.
All rights reserved. #ZipLib was originally developed by Mike Krueger (mike@icsharpcode.net) with
the following attributions: (i) Zip/Gzip implementation (a Java version of the zlib) originally created
by the Free Software Foundation (FSF); (ii) zlib authors Jean-loup Gailly (jloup@gzip.org), Mark
Adler (madler@alumni.caltech.edu) and its other contributors; (iii) Julian R Seward for the bzip2
implementation; (iv) the Java port done by Keiron Liddle, Aftex Software (keiron@aftexsw.com);
(v) tar implementation by Timothy Gerard Endres (time@gjt.org); and (vi) Christoph Wille for
beta testing, suggestions, and the setup of the Web site. The following is distributed under GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL) which is at http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.html and
is provided AS IS by authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU LGPL for more
details). Upon request, PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution: eXist, an Open Source Native XML Database. You
may obtain a copy of the source code at http://exist.sourceforge.net/index.html. The source code
is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. GTK+ - The GIMP Toolkit. You may obtain a copy of
the source code at http://www.gtk.org/, which is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. Java
Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn (arenn@urbanophile.com). You may obtain a copy of the
source code at http://www.urbanophile.com/arenn/hacking/download.html. The source code is
likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. JFreeChart is licensed under the GNU LGPL and can
be found at http://www.jfree.org. OmniORB Libraries (OmniOrb is distributed under the terms and
conditions of the GNU General Public License). The generic AIM library provided pursuant to the
JAIMBot project (http://jaimbot.sourceforge.net/). JAIMBot is a modular architecture for providing
services through an AIM client. It contains a generic AIM library and a Bot that uses this library to
provide such services as Offline Messaging and Weather. PTC does not use the Bot. JExcelApi
(http://jexcelapi.sourceforge.net/). 7-Zip Copyright 1999-2006 Igor Pavlov (http://www.7-zip.org).
libiconv Copyright 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. (http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/).
NHibernate 200x, Red Hat Middleware, LLC. All rights reserved (http://www.hibernate.
org/343.html). MPXJ 2000-2008, Packwood Software (http://mpxj.sourceforge.net/). Java
Server Faces V3.0.1 (http://java.sun.com/javaee/javaserverfaces/).
DevlL Image Lib 0.1.6.7
(http://openil.sourceforge.net/). Zip Master Component Lib 1.79 (http://www.delphizip.org). Exadel
RichFaces 3.0.1 (http://www.exadel.com). Jfree / Jfree Chart 1.0.0 (http://www.jfree.org/). Memory
DLLLoading code 0.0.1 (http://www.dsplayer.de/open source probjects/BTMemoryModule.zip).
May include Jena Software Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, LP. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Jena includes: JakartaORO
software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (described above).
ICU4J software Copyright 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others All
rights reserved. Software is used under the MIT license described above. Except as contained in
this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright
holder. CUP Parser Generator Copyright 1996-1999 by Scott Hudson, Frank Flannery, C. Scott

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Ananianused by permission. The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard
to this software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall
the authors or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages, or any
damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract,
negligence or other tortious action arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this
software. ImageMagick software is Copyright 1999-2005 ImageMagick Studio LLC, a nonprofit
organization dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available. ImageMagick
is freely available without charge and provided pursuant to the following license agreement:
http://www.imagemagick.org/script/license.php. Info-Zip and UnZip ( 1990 2001 Info ZIP, All
Rights Reserved) is provided AS IS and WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. For the complete
Info ZIP license see http://www.info-zip.org/doc/LICENSE. "Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set
of individuals: Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup
Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert
Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor
Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, and Mike White. ICU Libraries (International
Components for Unicode) Copyright 1995-2001 International Business Machines Corporation and
others, All rights reserved. Libraries are provided pursuant to the ICU Project (notice is set forth
above) at http://www-306.ibm.com/software/globalization/icu/index.jsp. The Independent JPEG
Group's JPEG software. This software is Copyright 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights
Reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. iText Library
- Copyright 1999-2006 by Bruno Lowagie and Paulo Soares. All Rights Reserved source
code and further information available at http://www.lowagie.com/iText. jpeg-6b.zip - JPEG image
compression library, version 6.2. Used to create images for HTML output; Provided pursuant to:
http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/part2. Pop up calendar components Copyright 1998 Netscape
Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. METIS, developed by George Karypis and Vipin
Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can be researched at http://www.cs.umn.edu/~karypis/metis.
Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License Version 1.1
(at http://www.mozilla.org/NPL). Software distributed under the Netscape Public License (NPL) is
distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied
(see the NPL for the rights and limitations that are governing different languages). The Original
Code is Mozilla Communicator client code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer of
the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape are
Copyright 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors:
Kazu Yamamoto (kazu@mozilla.gr.jp), Ryoichi Furukawa (furu@mozilla.gr.jp), Tsukasa Maruyama
(mal@mozilla.gr.jp), Teiji Matsuba (matsuba@dream.com). The following components are subject
to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.0 or 1.1 at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL (the MPL) and
said software is distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
expressed or implied and all warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations under PTCs
software license agreements are provided by PTC alone (see the MPL for the specific language
governing rights and limitations the source code and modifications thereto are available under the
MPL and are available upon request): Gecko and Mozilla components Spidermonkey Charset
Detector Saxon-B (http://www.saxonica.com/documentation/conditions/intro.html). Office Partner
Components 1.64 (http://sourceforge.net/projects/tpofficepartner/).
Rhino JavaScript engine,
distributed with a form of the Mozilla Public License (MPL). tiff-v3.4-tar.gz - Libtiff File IO Library
version 3.4: (see also http://www.libtiff.org ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff) Used by the image EFI
library; Provided pursuant to: http://www.libtiff.org/misc.html. The DITA standards, including
DITA DTDs, DITA Schemas, and portions of the DITA specification used in online help; copyright
2005-2009 OASIS Open. All rights reserved. This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/): Copyright 1998
2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) WHICH IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ''AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This
product also includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). pcre-4.3-2-src.zip Perl Compatible Regular Expression Library version 4.3. http://www.pcre.org; Provided pursuant
to: PCRE License. lpng120.zip - PNG image library version 1.2.0. http://www.ijg.org; Provided
pursuant to: http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt. libpng, Copyright 2004 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, which is distributed according to the disclaimer and license (as well as the list of

Contributing Authors) at http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt. METIS is 1997


Regents of the University of Minnesota.

Fo

rP
TC

In

te

rn

al

se

nl

Curl software, Copyright 1996 - 2005, Daniel Stenberg, All rights reserved. Software is used
under the following permissions: Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for
any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and
this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use, or other dealings. Java Advanced Imaging (JAI)
is provided pursuant to the Sun Java Distribution License (JDL) at http://www.jai.dev.java.net. The
terms of the JDL shall supersede any other licensing terms for PTC software with respect to JAI
components. Regular expression support is provided by the PCRE library package, which is open
source software, written by Philip Hazel, and copyright by the University of Cambridge, England.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Regular Expressions
support was derived from copyrighted software written by Henry Spencer, Copyright 1986 by
University of Toronto. SGML parser: Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998 James Clark,
1999 Matthias Clasen. XML parser and XSLT processing was developed using Libxml and Libxslt
by Daniel Veillard, Copyright 2001. libWWW (W3C's implementation of HTTP) can be found at:
http://www.w3.org/Library; Copyright 1994-2000 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique, Keio
University). All Rights Reserved. This program is distributed under the W3C's Software Intellectual
Property License at:
http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/2002/copyright-software-20021231.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. See W3C License http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal for more details. Copyright
1995 CERN. "This product includes computer software created and made available by CERN.
This acknowledgment shall be mentioned in full in any product which includes the CERN computer
software included herein or parts thereof." Perl support was developed with the aid of Perl Kit,
Version 5.0. Copyright 1989-2002, Larry Wall. All rights reserved. The cad2eda program
utilizes wxWidgets (formerly wxWindows) libraries for its cross-platform UI API, which is licensed
under the wxWindows Library License at http://www.wxwindows.org. ZLib - Compression library;
Copyright 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; Provided pursuant to ZLib License at
http://www.zlib.net/zlib_license.html. ATLPort copyright 1999, 2000 Boris Fomitchev is provided by
the copyright holder "as is" with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Permission to use
or copy this software for any purpose is granted without fee, provided the foregoing notices are
retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is granted,
provided the above notices are retained and a notice that the code was modified is included with the
above copyright notice. PTC reserves the right to modify this code and may do so without further
notice. OpenCASCADE software is subject to the Open CASCADE Technology Public License
Version 6.2 (the "License"). This software may only be used in compliance with the License.
A copy of the License may be obtained at http://www.opencascade.org. The Initial Developer
of the Original Code is Open CASCADE S.A.S., with main offices at 15 bis, rue Ernest Renan
92136, Issy Les Moulineaux, France. The Original Code is copyright Open CASCADE S.A.S.,
2001. All rights reserved. "The Original Code and all software distributed under the License
are distributed by OpenCASCADE on an "AS IS" basis, without warranty of any kind, and the
Initial Developer hereby disclaims all such warranties, including without limitation, any warranties
of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or noninfringement (please see the License
for the specific terms and conditions governing rights and limitations under the License). PTC
product warranties are provided solely by PTC. Certain Pro/TOOLMAKER functions/libraries are
as follows: CSubclassWnd version 2.0 - Misc. C++ software; Copyright 2000 NEWare Software.
STLPort - C++ templates; 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev; Provided pursuant to: STLPort License
http://stlport.sourceforge.net/License.shtml. Zip32 - Compression library; Copyright 1990-2007.
Info-ZIP; Provided pursuant to: Info-ZIP License http://www.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html.
Inno Setup - Installer package; Copyright 1997-2007 Jordan Russell; Provided pursuant to Inno
Setup License http://www.jrsoftware.org/files/is/license.txt. 7-Zip - Compression package; Copyright
1999-2007 Igor Pavlov; Provided pursuant to 7-Zip License http://www.7-zip.org/license.txt. The
implementation of the loop macro in CoCreate Modeling is based on code originating from MIT
and Symbolics, Inc. Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1986 by the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology and Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992 by Symbolics, Inc. All
Rights Reserved. Used under license pursuant to which permission to use, copy, modify and
distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is granted, provided
that the copyright holders copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The names "M.I.T." and

nl

"Massachusetts Institute of Technology" and "Symbolics" may not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Notice must
be given in supporting documentation that copying distribution is by permission of the copyright
holders. The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for
any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. ORACLE, ODBC, and
DB2/CLI Template Library, Version 4.0.126, Copyright Sergei Kuchin, 1996, 20xx. This library
is free software. Permission to use, copy, modify and redistribute it for any purpose is hereby
granted without fee, provided that the preceding copyright statement appears in all copies. (see
http://otl.sourceforge.net/) The following items are used and licensed pursuant to the Common
Development and Distribution License (CDDL). See https://mq.dev.java.net/LICENSE.txt. Metro
Web Services Stack, Copyright Sun Microsystems. The copyright holders of this library give
permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable, regardless of the
license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the resulting executable
under differing terms, provided that, for each linked independent module, the terms and conditions
of the license of that module are met. Source Code for Metro will be provided upon request and is
licensed under the terms of the CDDL. Open MQ In addition, this project uses Mozilla Network
Security Services and Network Security Portable Runtime (NSS / NSPR) which are licensed under
the Mozilla Public License. OpenDS uses BerkeleyDB which is described above.

In

te

rn

al

se

The following components are licensed pursuant to the Common Public License (CPL). All warranties
and awarded damage relief from use of the technology as provided by PTC are provided solely by
PTC and same is disclaimed by other contributors. Source code for the program is available upon
request under the terms of the CPL: WIX Installer Toolkit, copyright Microsoft Corp. NSIS (Nullsoft
Scriptable Install System), Copyright 1995-20xx, all Contributors. Includes zlib/libpng, bzip2, and
lzma compression modules with licensing information at http://nsis.sourceforge.net/License. Certain
software is Copyright 2000 - 2008 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle (http://www.bouncycastle.org).
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
to the following conditions. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

rP
TC

This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and
Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a)
(JUN95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For
procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government
is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227 7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227 19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable. 05222009

Fo

Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA


PRINTING HISTORY
Document No.
T3408-380-01

Date

Description

08/25/2011

Initial Printing of:


Milling using Creo Parametric

Order Number DT-T3408-380-01


Printed in the U.S.A